Docly

Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 7 Theo Công Văn 5512 Học Kì 1 Rất Hay

Đề thi tham khảo

Giáo Án Dạy Thêm Ngữ Văn 7 Kết Nối Tri Thức Học Kỳ 2
Đề Cương Ôn Tập Anh Văn 7 Học Kì 1 Năm 2022-2023
Chuyên Đề Giới Thiệu Và Cảm Thụ Một Số Thể Loại Tác Phẩm Trữ Tình

Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 7 Theo Công Văn 5512 Học Kì 1 Rất Hay là tài liệu học tập được Trang Tài Liệu biên soạn và sưu tầm từ những nguồn dữ liệu mới nhất hiện nay. Tài liệu này sẽ giúp các em luyện tập, củng cố kiến thức từ đó nâng cao điểm số cho môn học. Ngoài ra, cũng giúp các thầy cô giáo có nguồn tài nguyên phong phú để giảng dạy.

Các giáo án được thiết kế theo từng chủ đề và đơn vị bài học, tạo sự liên kết logic giữa các khái niệm và kỹ năng Tiếng Anh. Giáo án cũng tạo điều kiện cho học sinh tham gia vào các hoạt động cá nhân, nhóm và cả lớp, từ đó phát triển khả năng giao tiếp, sáng tạo và phản xạ trong việc sử dụng Tiếng Anh.

Các hoạt động và bài tập trong giáo án được thiết kế để phát triển cả kỹ năng ngôn ngữ và kỹ năng sống cho học sinh. Đồng thời, giáo án cũng chú trọng đến việc rèn luyện khả năng tự học, tư duy logic và phân tích thông tin, từ đó giúp học sinh tự tin và thành công trong việc học Tiếng Anh.

Với giáo án Tiếng Anh lớp 7 theo công văn 5512 học kỳ 1, giáo viên và học sinh sẽ có một khung giảng dạy chất lượng và mang tính ứng dụng cao. Hãy sẵn sàng khám phá và trải nghiệm những bài học thú vị và hữu ích trong giáo án này

Dưới đây là bản đọc trực tuyến giúp thầy cô và các em học sinh có thể nghiên cứu Online hoặc bạn có thể tải miễn phí với phiên bản word để dễ dàng in ấn cũng như học tập Offline.

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A………………‌ ‌

7B……………….‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌1:‌ ‌

INTRODUCE‌ ‌THE‌ ‌SUBJECT,‌ ‌THE‌ ‌PROGRAM‌ ‌AND‌ ‌REVIEW‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-Know‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌basic‌ ‌content‌ ‌of‌ ‌English‌ ‌7.‌ ‌

-Know‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌feature‌ ‌of‌ ‌subject‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌best‌ ‌effect.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowledge:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌of‌ ‌using‌ ‌English‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌Have‌ ‌a‌ ‌knowledge‌ ‌about‌ ‌

country,‌ ‌people‌ ‌and‌ ‌culture‌ ‌of‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌English‌ ‌countries.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Tenses:‌ ‌Present‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌present‌ ‌progressive,‌ ‌Be‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+V.inf‌ ‌.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌ ‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌Love‌ ‌the‌ ‌English‌ ‌subject‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌it‌ ‌regularly.‌ ‌Proud‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌culture‌ ‌and‌ ‌

mother‌ ‌tongue.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌TEACHING‌ ‌AIDS:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Check‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌No‌ ‌checking‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌remember‌ ‌some‌ ‌activities‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌summer‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

subjects‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌program.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions,‌ ‌ ‌

?‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌do‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌summer‌ ‌

(play‌ ‌soccer,‌ ‌play‌ ‌games,….)‌ ‌

?‌ ‌How‌ ‌often‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌play‌ ‌soccer‌ ‌

?‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌often‌ ‌help‌ ‌your‌ ‌parents‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

housework‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌subject‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌program‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌review‌‌ ‌‌present‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌present‌ ‌progressive,‌ ‌be‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+V.inf‌ ‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌ss‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

present‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌progressive‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌

be‌ ‌going‌ ‌to.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌tense:‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Form:‌ ‌

To‌ ‌be:‌ ‌‌am,‌ ‌is,‌ ‌are‌ ‌ ‌

+)‌ ‌S+‌ ‌V(s,‌ ‌es)‌ ‌

Ex:‌ ‌I‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌school‌ ‌everyday‌ ‌

-)‌ ‌S+‌ ‌do/‌ ‌does‌ ‌+‌ ‌not‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.inf‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌recall‌ ‌the‌ ‌knowledge‌ ‌of‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

tense,‌ ‌present‌ ‌progressive,‌ ‌be‌ ‌going‌ ‌to.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌copy‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌examples‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

present‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌progressive‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌

be‌ ‌going‌ ‌to.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌examples‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

(do‌ ‌not‌ ‌=‌ ‌don’t/‌ ‌does‌ ‌not‌ ‌=‌ ‌doesn’t)‌ ‌

Ex:‌ ‌She‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌play‌ ‌volleyball‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

morning‌ ‌

?‌ ‌)‌ ‌Do/‌ ‌does‌ ‌+‌ ‌S+‌ ‌V.inf?‌ ‌

Yes,‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌do/does.‌ ‌

No,‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌don’t/‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌

Ex:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌walk‌ ‌to‌ ‌school‌ ‌every‌ ‌day?‌ ‌

Yes,‌ ‌I‌ ‌do/‌ ‌No,‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t.‌ ‌

Wh-‌ ‌question:‌ ‌

Wh‌ ‌+‌ ‌do/does‌ ‌+‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌Vinf?‌ ‌

Ex:‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌do‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌weekend?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌progressive‌ ‌tense:‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Form‌:‌ ‌

+)‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌am/‌ ‌is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.ing‌ ‌

-)‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌am/is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌not‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.ing‌ ‌

?‌ ‌)‌ ‌Am/is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.ing?‌ ‌ ‌

Yes,‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌am/‌ ‌is/‌ ‌are.‌ ‌

No,‌ ‌S‌ ‌+am‌ ‌not‌ ‌/isn’t/‌ ‌aren’t.‌ ‌ ‌

Wh-question:‌ ‌Wh‌ ‌+am/is‌ ‌/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌

V.ing?‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Use:‌ ‌ ‌Express‌ ‌an‌ ‌action‌ ‌which‌ ‌is‌ ‌

happening‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌moment,‌ ‌often‌ ‌go‌ ‌with‌ ‌

now”,‌ ‌“at‌ ‌the‌ ‌moment”‌ ‌

Ex:‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌watching‌ ‌TV‌ ‌now.‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Be‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+Vinf:‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Form‌:‌ ‌

+)‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌am/‌ ‌is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+V.inf‌ ‌

-)‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌am/is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌not‌ ‌+‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+‌ ‌

V.inf.‌ ‌

?‌ ‌)‌ ‌Am/is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+Vinf?‌ ‌ ‌

Yes,‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌am/is/are‌ ‌

No,‌ ‌S‌ ‌+am‌ ‌not‌ ‌/isn’t/aren’t‌ ‌ ‌

Wh-question:‌ ‌Wh‌ ‌+am/is/are‌ ‌+‌ ‌S‌ ‌+‌ ‌

going‌ ‌to‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.inf?‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Use:‌ ‌‌Express‌ ‌an‌ ‌action‌ ‌which‌ ‌happen‌ ‌

surely‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌

Ex:‌ ‌She‌ ‌is‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌visit‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Long‌ ‌Bay‌ ‌

next‌ ‌summer.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌tenses‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌‌ ‌‌exercise‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌1.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌practice.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌comments‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Exercise:‌ ‌‌Give‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌

verbs.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌She‌ ‌(play)…………….‌ ‌chess‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

evening‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Now‌ ‌we‌ ‌(cook)……………..‌ ‌dinner‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌They‌ ‌(not‌ ‌do)…………….‌ ‌their‌ ‌

homework‌ ‌on‌ ‌Sunday‌ ‌evenings‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌He‌ ‌(ride)…………………….‌ ‌his‌ ‌

bicycle‌ ‌to‌ ‌school‌ ‌every‌ ‌morning‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Where……………..you‌ ‌

(go)…………‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌moment?‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌(stay)‌ ‌………………‌ ‌in‌ ‌Hue‌ ‌

next‌ ‌weekend‌ ‌

*Answer:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌plays‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌rides‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌are‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌are…going‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌do‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌is‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌stay‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A………………….‌ ‌

7B…………………‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started-‌ ‌My‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌for‌ ‌

information‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌“My‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌hobby”,‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌activities‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobbies,‌ ‌practice‌ ‌asking‌ ‌and‌ ‌answering‌ ‌with:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.ing..?,‌ ‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Hobbies‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌  ‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌like‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌‌Competences‌:‌‌ ‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌‌ ‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedures:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌To‌ ‌attract‌ ‌S’s‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌

like‌ ‌doing‌ ‌for‌ ‌pleasure‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌free‌ ‌

time.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌unit‌ ‌title‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies”‌ ‌

Questions:‌ ‌

-What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌doing‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌free‌ ‌time?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌dolls?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌glass‌ ‌bottles?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌climbing?‌ ‌

…‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌all‌ ‌these‌ ‌activities‌ ‌are‌ ‌called?‌ ‌

HOBBIES‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌idoms‌ ‌and‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌

do‌ ‌part‌ ‌a,b.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

book‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌guess‌ ‌who‌ ‌are‌ ‌they‌ ‌?‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Where‌ ‌are‌ ‌they?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌can‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌shelf‌ ‌?‌ ‌

What‌ ‌may‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌be‌ ‌?‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌them‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌idoms‌ ‌

a‌ ‌piece‌ ‌of‌ ‌cake‌ ‌”‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conversation:‌ ‌as‌ ‌easy‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌pie/‌ ‌as‌ ‌

ABC‌ ‌=‌ ‌very‌ ‌easy,‌ ‌or‌ ‌very‌ ‌easily;‌ ‌all‌ ‌

of‌ ‌a‌ ‌piece‌ ‌=‌ ‌all‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌time...etc...‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌

independently,‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌

again‌ ‌and‌ ‌decide‌ ‌if‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌true‌ ‌or‌ ‌

false.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌share‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌practice‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌Nick,‌ ‌Elena‌ ‌(‌ ‌Nick’s‌ ‌sister)‌ ‌and‌ ‌

Mi.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌at‌ ‌Nick’s‌ ‌house.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌see‌ ‌so‌ ‌many‌ ‌dolls‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌shelf.‌ ‌The‌ ‌

hobby‌ ‌may‌ ‌be‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌dolls.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

a.‌ ‌Are‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌below‌ ‌true‌ ‌(T)‌ ‌or‌ ‌false‌ ‌

(F)?‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌F‌ ‌(They‌ ‌go‌ ‌upstairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌her‌ ‌room)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌F(‌ ‌Mi’s‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌glass‌ ‌bottles)‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌F‌ ‌(‌ ‌Her‌ ‌parents,‌ ‌aunt‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncle)‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

 ‌

b.‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌She‌ ‌receives‌ ‌dolls‌ ‌on‌ ‌special‌ ‌occasions.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌No,‌ ‌they‌ ‌aren’t.‌ ‌


T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌

write‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌She‌ ‌keeps‌ ‌them‌ ‌after‌ ‌using‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌No,‌ ‌she‌ ‌doesn’t.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌No,‌ ‌he‌ ‌hasn’t.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌practice‌ ‌some‌ ‌activities‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobbies,‌ ‌practice‌ ‌asking‌ ‌and‌ ‌answering‌ ‌with:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.ing..?.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌

repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌practise‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words/‌ ‌phrases.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌from‌ ‌2‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures.‌ ‌Have‌ ‌them‌ ‌compare‌ ‌the‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌feedback‌ ‌and‌ ‌confirm‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌in‌ ‌

part‌ ‌3‌ ‌are‌ ‌cheap,‌ ‌expensive,‌ ‌easy‌ ‌or‌ ‌

dificult‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

S1:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌cycling‌ ‌is‌ ‌cheap‌ ‌or‌ ‌

expensive?‌ ‌

S2:‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌cycling‌ ‌is‌ ‌cheap.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌set‌ ‌a‌ ‌time‌ ‌5‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌

this‌ ‌activity.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌around‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌

ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌Use‌ ‌

the‌ ‌question:‌ ‌“Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like...?”‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌practice‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌loud‌ ‌his‌ ‌or‌ ‌her‌ ‌

friend’s‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Matching.‌ ‌

Keys‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌playing‌ ‌board‌ ‌games.‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌taking‌ ‌photos.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌bird-wattching‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌cycling‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌playing‌ ‌the‌ ‌guitar‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌gardening‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌arranging‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌

9.‌ ‌skating‌ ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table.‌ ‌

 ‌

Cheap‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌

Expensive‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌

Easy‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌

Difficult‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌

-cycling‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Example:‌ ‌

Tuan:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌gardening,‌ ‌Hoa‌ ‌?‌ ‌

Hoa:‌ ‌No,‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌

Tuan:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌cycling,‌ ‌Lien?‌ ‌

Lien:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌I‌ ‌do.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

Hoa‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌gardening.‌ ‌

Lien‌ ‌likes‌ ‌cycling.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌‌ ‌‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌review‌‌ ‌‌the‌ ‌vocabularies‌ ‌by‌ ‌playing‌ ‌game‌ ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌retell‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabularies‌ ‌by‌ ‌

playing‌ ‌game:‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌a‌ ‌student‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌

to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

and‌ ‌other‌ ‌students‌ ‌guess‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌play‌ ‌game‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

Hoa:‌ ‌gives‌ ‌an‌ ‌activity‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks:‌ ‌

What‌ ‌am‌ ‌I‌ ‌doing?‌ ‌

Other‌ ‌students‌ ‌answer:‌ ‌Playing‌ ‌the‌ ‌

guitar.‌ ‌

Hoa:‌ ‌That’s‌ ‌right.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook:‌ ‌A2‌ ‌(p.3),‌ ‌B3,‌ ‌5‌ ‌(P.4,5)‌ ‌.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌the‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:7A……………..‌ ‌

7B………………‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌3:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌

hobbies.‌ ‌Pronounce‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌‌ə‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌ɜ‌ ‌:/‌ ‌in‌ ‌context.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌‌ ‌‌Vocabulary:‌‌ ‌‌Hobbies,‌ ‌Action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌review‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing.‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌‌ə‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌ɜ‌ ‌:/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌‌ ‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌‌ ‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up.‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

What‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌


Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌correctly‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌‌ə‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ɜ‌‌ ‌:/‌ ‌isolation‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌context‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌

-Have‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌out‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words‌ ‌first.‌ ‌

-Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌they‌ ‌

hear.‌ ‌

-Repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌

and‌ ‌then‌ ‌put‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

column.‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌7:‌ ‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

-Compare‌ ‌and‌ ‌check‌ ‌their‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌

Say‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌that‌ ‌has‌ ‌‌ə‌ ‌/‌ ‌or‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ɜ‌‌ ‌:/.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌you‌ ‌

aear.‌ ‌Repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

bird-watching‌ ‌

√‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

√‌ ‌ ‌

away‌ ‌

√‌ ‌neighbour‌ ‌

‌√‌ ‌burn‌ ‌

singer‌ ‌

‌√‌ ‌hurt‌ ‌

√‌ ‌heard‌ ‌

‌√‌ ‌Birth‌ ‌

√‌ ‌common‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌put‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌column.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

/‌ ‌ə‌ ‌/‌ ‌

/‌ ‌‌ɜ‌ ‌

:/‌ ‌

away‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌

neighbour‌ ‌

common‌ ‌

burn‌ ‌

birth‌ ‌

hurt‌ ‌

heard‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌7:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌/‌ ‌ə‌ ‌

/‌ ‌or‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ɜ‌‌ ‌:/.‌ ‌Practise‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1‌ ‌

√‌ ‌

 ‌

2‌ ‌

√‌ ‌

 ‌

3‌ ‌

 ‌

√‌ ‌

4‌ ‌

√‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice.‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌and‌ ‌structure:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌

V-ing....?‌ ‌Know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌and‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌

with‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌(T‌ ‌prepares‌ ‌cards)‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobbies.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.Matching‌ ‌

A‌ ‌

B‌ ‌

1.go‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌play‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌collect‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌take‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌watch‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌arrange‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌do‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌TV‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌the‌ ‌piano‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌camping‌ ‌

d.‌ ‌photos‌ ‌

e.‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌

f.‌ ‌gynastics‌ ‌

g.‌ ‌bottles‌ ‌



 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌practice‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌question:‌ ‌“Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌

V-ing....?”‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

S1:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌watching‌ ‌TV?‌ ‌

S2:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌I‌ ‌do‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌reminds‌ ‌them‌ ‌that‌ ‌a‌ ‌action‌ ‌verb‌ ‌stand‌ ‌

after‌ ‌subject,‌ ‌a‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌stands‌ ‌after‌ ‌some‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌such‌ ‌as‌ ‌like,‌ ‌love,‌ ‌enjoy…‌ ‌or‌ ‌can‌ ‌

be‌ ‌subject.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

carefully‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌sure‌ ‌they‌ ‌understand‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌explains:‌ ‌-‌ ‌A‌ ‌keyword‌ ‌helps‌ ‌you‌ ‌

understand‌ ‌a‌ ‌text‌ ‌quickly,‌ ‌and‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌

usually‌ ‌a‌ ‌noun,‌ ‌verb,‌ ‌adjective‌ ‌or‌ ‌

adverb.‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Groupwork‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Devide‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌into‌ ‌groups‌ ‌.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Each‌ ‌group‌ ‌will‌ ‌write‌ ‌words‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

card.The‌ ‌group‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌words‌ ‌is‌ ‌

the‌ ‌winner.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Time:‌ ‌3‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌

 ‌

8.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌

h.‌ ‌to‌ ‌music‌ ‌

 ‌

Keys‌ ‌

1.c‌ ‌2.‌ ‌b‌ ‌3.‌ ‌g‌ ‌4.‌ ‌d‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌a‌ ‌6.‌ ‌e‌ ‌7.‌ ‌f‌ ‌8.‌ ‌h‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌blank‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

with‌ ‌one‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌or‌ ‌one‌ ‌action‌ ‌verb‌ ‌from‌ ‌

the‌ ‌box‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*Keys‌ ‌

1.Swimming,‌ ‌swim‌ ‌

2.Listen,‌ ‌listening‌ ‌to‌ ‌music‌ ‌

3.Plant,‌ ‌gardening‌ ‌

4.Catch,‌ ‌fishing‌ ‌

5.Painting,‌ ‌paints‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌what‌ ‌a‌ ‌keyword‌ ‌is?‌ ‌

Look‌ ‌out!‌ ‌(Page‌ ‌12)‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Hobby‌ ‌

Keywords‌ ‌

Listening‌ ‌

to‌ ‌music‌ ‌

Melody,‌ ‌songs,‌ ‌

headphones,‌ ‌noise.....‌ ‌

gardening‌ ‌

Trees,‌ ‌flowers,‌ ‌garden...‌ ‌

fishing‌ ‌

Lake,‌ ‌pond,‌ ‌catch,‌ ‌fish…‌ ‌

painting‌ ‌

Creative,‌ ‌colours,‌ ‌artist…‌ ‌

swimming‌ ‌

Pool,‌ ‌fun,‌ ‌keep‌ ‌fit,‌ ‌

swim...‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌play.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌group.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Each‌ ‌student‌ ‌thinks‌ ‌of‌ ‌a‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌and‌ ‌

says‌ ‌keywords‌ ‌out‌ ‌loud.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Game:‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌water,‌ ‌grow,‌ ‌flowers,vegetable.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Is‌ ‌it‌ ‌gardening‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌rest‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌group‌ ‌tries‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess:‌ ‌

What‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is..?‌ ‌

--‌ ‌The‌ ‌student‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌

points‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌winner.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌it‌ ‌is.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook:‌ ‌A1‌ ‌P3,‌ ‌B1,2‌ ‌P4‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:7A………………‌ ‌

7B………………..‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌4:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌  ‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌the‌ ‌

future‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing‌ ‌correctly‌ ‌and‌ ‌appropriately.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌‌ ‌Hobbies,‌ ‌Action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌

‌‌b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌tense.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Future‌ ‌simple‌ ‌tense‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ving‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3‌.‌ ‌‌Qualities:‌‌ ‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌T‌ ‌ask‌ ‌ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌previous‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Call‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌student‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

-That‌ ‌student‌ ‌thinks‌ ‌of‌ ‌a‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌and‌ ‌says‌ ‌

keywords‌ ‌out‌ ‌loud.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌rest‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌group‌ ‌tries‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌

What‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is..?‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌student‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌points‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌

winner.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌water,‌ ‌

grow,flowers,vegetable.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Is‌ ‌it‌ ‌gardening‌ ‌?‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌it‌ ‌is.‌ ‌

 ‌


Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌two‌ ‌tenses‌ ‌:‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌

future‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌Tasks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌retell‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌

uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌two‌ ‌tenses:‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

and‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ss:‌ ‌Retell‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌two‌ ‌

tenses:‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌

future‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌comments‌ ‌and‌ ‌explains‌ ‌again.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌Look‌ ‌out‌ ‌!‌ ‌Box.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌May‌ ‌call‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌make‌ ‌

sure‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌understand‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

‌‌-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌That‌ ‌x‌ ‌3‌ ‌per‌ ‌week‌ ‌means‌ ‌

three‌ ‌times‌ ‌a‌ ‌week‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌

1.The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌

simple‌ ‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

+)‌ ‌S+‌ ‌V.(s,‌ ‌es)‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌The‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple‌ ‌ ‌

+)‌ ‌S+‌ ‌will‌ ‌+‌ ‌V‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ving‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Look‌ ‌out‌ ‌!‌ ‌(‌ ‌In‌ ‌Studentbook)‌ ‌

Like,‌ ‌love,‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌hate‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ving‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌Use‌ ‌

the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌or‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs.‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.loves;‌ ‌will‌ ‌not/won’t‌ ‌continue‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌take‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌does...do‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌will‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Do...do‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Will...play‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌The‌ ‌table‌ ‌below‌ ‌shows‌ ‌the‌ ‌

results‌ ‌of‌ ‌Nick’s‌ ‌survey‌ ‌on‌ ‌his‌ ‌

classmates’‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌

and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌his‌ ‌report‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌

present‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Likes‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Watch‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌love‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌“‌ ‌frequency”‌ ‌means‌ ‌how‌ ‌

often‌ ‌someone‌ ‌does‌ ‌something‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌

given‌ ‌time‌ ‌frame.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌each‌ ‌group‌ ‌writes‌ ‌a‌ ‌short‌ ‌report‌ ‌

similar‌ ‌to‌ ‌Nick’s‌ ‌report‌ ‌in‌ ‌2‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌comment‌ ‌and‌ ‌votes‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌

best‌ ‌report.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌go‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Enjoy‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Play‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌plays‌ ‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌Doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌ ‌

9.‌ ‌plays‌ ‌

 ‌

Exercise‌ ‌3:‌ ‌

a‌.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌report‌ ‌about‌ ‌what‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌

found‌ ‌out.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌‌ ‌‌the‌ ‌form:‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ving‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

Ex4‌:‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌classmate‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Call‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌out‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌example‌ ‌and‌ ‌explain‌ ‌

the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌activity.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌as‌ ‌clues.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Call‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.Check‌ ‌and‌ ‌

comment‌ ‌on‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences,‌ ‌using‌ ‌

the‌ ‌–ing‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box.‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.riding‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Watching;‌ ‌going‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌talking‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Playing‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌eating‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Walking‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌

sentences...‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌He‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌eating‌ ‌apples.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌They‌ ‌love‌ ‌playing‌ ‌table‌ ‌tennis‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌She‌ ‌hates‌ ‌playing‌ ‌the‌ ‌piano.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌He‌ ‌enjoys‌ ‌gardening.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌She‌ ‌likes‌ ‌dancing.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌what‌ ‌each‌ ‌member‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌family‌ ‌like‌ ‌or‌ ‌dislike‌ ‌doing‌ ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

classmate.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Call‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.Ask‌ ‌other‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌for‌ ‌

theircomments.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌What‌ ‌does‌ ‌each‌ ‌member‌ ‌in‌ ‌

your‌ ‌family‌ ‌like‌ ‌or‌ ‌not‌ ‌like‌ ‌doing?‌ ‌

Write‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1,‌ ‌My‌ ‌father‌ ‌likes...‌ ‌

2,‌ ‌My‌ ‌father‌ ‌hates...‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌any‌ ‌mistakes.‌ ‌


 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌B4,‌ ‌B6‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:7A………………‌ ‌

7B…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌opinions‌ ‌

about‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

1.Knowlegdes:‌ ‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌‌ ‌Hobbies,‌ ‌Action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌review‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌-‌ ‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌in‌ ‌free‌ ‌time.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌TEACHING‌ ‌AIDS:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌say‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

The‌ ‌contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Answer‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

*Question‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌free‌ ‌

time‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌does‌ ‌your‌ ‌father‌ ‌do‌ ‌in‌ ‌his‌ ‌free‌ ‌

time‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌does‌ ‌he‌ ‌like‌ ‌doing‌ ‌or‌ ‌hate‌ ‌doing‌ ‌

?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌use‌ ‌of‌ ‌vocabularies‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic:‌ ‌My‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌teaches‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Extra‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌copy‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌

match‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Making‌ ‌pottery:‌ ‌making‌ ‌

pots,dishes…from‌ ‌clay‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Making‌ ‌models:‌ ‌making‌ ‌copies‌ ‌of‌ ‌

things,‌ ‌usually‌ ‌smaller‌ ‌than‌ ‌the‌ ‌original‌ ‌

objects.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Carving‌ ‌wood:‌ ‌making‌ ‌objects,‌ ‌and‌ ‌

patterns‌ ‌by‌ ‌cutting‌ ‌away‌ ‌material‌ ‌from‌ ‌

wood.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Unusual:‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌what‌ ‌is‌ ‌usual‌ ‌or‌ ‌

normal.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Take‌ ‌up‌ ‌sth:‌ ‌learn‌ ‌or‌ ‌start‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌

something,‌ ‌especially‌ ‌for‌ ‌pleasure.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Exercise.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures.‌ ‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

A.carving‌ ‌wood‌ ‌ ‌

B.making‌ ‌models‌ ‌

C.ice-skating‌ ‌ ‌

D.dancing‌ ‌

E.making‌ ‌pottery.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌understandthe‌ ‌structure‌ ‌Find‌ ‌+‌ ‌doing‌ ‌+‌ ‌sth‌ ‌+‌ ‌adj.‌ ‌

or‌ ‌think‌ ‌(that)‌ ‌+‌ ‌doing‌ ‌sth‌ ‌+‌ ‌is‌ ‌+‌ ‌adj‌ ‌then‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌Look‌ ‌out!‌ ‌Box.‌ ‌

Write‌ ‌some‌ ‌example‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board‌ ‌and‌ ‌underline‌ ‌the‌ ‌two‌ ‌structures.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌

appropriate‌ ‌boxes.Then,‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌below‌ ‌by‌ ‌writing‌ ‌one‌ ‌reason‌ ‌to‌ ‌

explain‌ ‌your‌ ‌choice.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌models‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

partner.‌ ‌

-Ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Other‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌and‌ ‌T‌ ‌give‌ ‌comments.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌boxes.Then‌ ‌,‌ ‌complete‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌swimming‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌

Find‌ ‌+‌ ‌doing‌ ‌+‌ ‌sth‌ ‌+‌ ‌adj.‌ ‌

or‌ ‌think‌ ‌(that)‌ ‌+‌ ‌doing‌ ‌sth‌ ‌+‌ ‌is‌ ‌+‌ ‌adj.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌making‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌‌boring‌‌ ‌because‌ ‌

it‌ ‌is‌ ‌difficult‌.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌dancing‌ ‌is‌ ‌boringbecause‌ ‌

……….‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌ice-skating‌ ‌is‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌because‌ ‌

………‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌making‌ ‌models‌ ‌is‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌

because‌ ‌…‌ ‌



2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌carving‌ ‌wood‌ ‌is‌ ‌boring‌ ‌because‌ ‌

…‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌interview‌ ‌a‌ ‌classmate‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌conversations‌ ‌

as‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌example‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌take‌ ‌turns‌ ‌being‌ ‌the‌ ‌person‌ ‌who‌ ‌

asks‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌This‌ ‌St‌ ‌has‌ ‌to‌ ‌note‌ ‌

down‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌partner’s‌ ‌answers‌ ‌to‌ ‌report‌ ‌

to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌report‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

 ‌

3‌ ‌Game‌ ‌

Now,‌ ‌interview‌ ‌a‌ ‌classmate‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌in‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Take‌ ‌notes‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌your‌ ‌

partner’s‌ ‌answers‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

You:‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌about‌ ‌making‌ ‌

pottery?/‌ ‌How‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌find‌ ‌making‌ ‌

pottery?‌ ‌

Mai:‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌it‌ ‌is…/‌ ‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌it…‌ ‌

You:‌ ‌Why?‌ ‌

Mai:‌ ‌Because…‌ ‌

You:‌ ‌Will‌ ‌you‌ ‌take‌ ‌up‌ ‌making‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌future?‌ ‌

Mai:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌I‌ ‌will/‌ ‌I’m‌ ‌not‌ ‌sure.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise:‌ ‌C1,2‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:7A……………..‌ ‌

7B……………..‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌‌ ‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌students‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Read‌ ‌for‌ ‌specific‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌unusual‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌and‌ ‌share‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Hobbies,‌ ‌Action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌review‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book‌.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T:‌ ‌Call‌ ‌pupils‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌black‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌them‌ ‌some‌ ‌question:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss:‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌question.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌question‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Question‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌making‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌?‌ ‌Why?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌carving‌ ‌wood?‌ ‌Why?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌carve‌ ‌eggshells?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

topic:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies,‌ ‌then‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌They‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌three‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Elicit‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌from‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌and‌ ‌quickly‌ ‌

write‌ ‌them‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌classmate.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Reading:‌ ‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

below.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌see‌ ‌a‌ ‌teddy‌ ‌bear,‌ ‌a‌ ‌flower‌ ‌and‌ ‌a‌ ‌

bird‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌of‌ ‌eggshells.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌carving‌ ‌eggshells.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌New‌ ‌words:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Eggshell:‌ ‌vỏ‌ ‌trứng‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Carve‌ ‌:trạm‌ ‌khắc‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Fragile:‌ ‌mong‌ ‌manh‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Art‌ ‌gallery‌ ‌:‌ ‌phòng‌ ‌trưng‌ ‌bày‌ ‌nghệ‌ ‌

thuật.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Unique‌ ‌:‌ ‌độc‌ ‌đáo.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Gift:‌ ‌quà‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌underline‌ ‌parts‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌that‌ ‌

help‌ ‌them‌ ‌find‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌and‌ ‌confirm‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌He‌ ‌thinks‌ ‌his‌ ‌father’s‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌unusual‌ ‌

because‌ ‌eggshells‌ ‌are‌ ‌very‌ ‌fragile‌ ‌and‌ ‌his‌ ‌

father‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌beautiful‌ ‌pieces‌ ‌of‌ ‌art‌ ‌

from‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌He‌ ‌saw‌ ‌the‌ ‌carved‌ ‌eggshells‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌

first‌ ‌time‌ ‌in‌ ‌art‌ ‌gallery‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌USA.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌They‌ ‌find‌ ‌it‌ ‌difficult‌ ‌and‌ ‌boring.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌he‌ ‌does.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌below….‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌carving‌ ‌eggshells.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌the‌ ‌Us‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌the‌ ‌internet‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌time‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌gifts.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Discuss‌ ‌other‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌these‌ ‌pieces‌ ‌of‌ ‌art‌ ‌and‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌

carved‌ ‌eggshells.‌ ‌Encourage‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌

creatively.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌and‌ ‌take‌ ‌turns‌ ‌

talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌ ‌

They‌ ‌vote‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌exciting‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

most‌ ‌exciting‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌of‌ ‌their‌ ‌group.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌comments‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌turn‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobbies‌ ‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Nick‌ ‌says‌ ‌that‌ ‌carved‌ ‌eggshells‌ ‌

can‌ ‌be‌ ‌used‌ ‌as‌ ‌gifts‌ ‌for‌ ‌your‌ ‌family‌ ‌and‌ ‌

friends.‌ ‌In‌ ‌pairs,‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌other‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌

these‌ ‌pieces‌ ‌of‌ ‌artwork.‌ ‌Share‌ ‌your‌ ‌

ideas‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

Some‌ ‌uses:‌ ‌decorations‌ ‌at‌ ‌home,‌ ‌

sourvenirs,‌ ‌lights‌ ‌(with‌ ‌bigger‌ ‌eggs)..‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌Take‌ ‌turns…‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌drawing‌ ‌.I‌ ‌started‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobby‌ ‌a‌ ‌year‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌easy‌ ‌because‌ ‌I‌ ‌

learn‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌draw‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.I‌ ‌find‌ ‌this‌ ‌

hobby‌ ‌useful‌ ‌becausethe‌ ‌drew‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌

are‌ ‌unique‌ ‌gifts‌ ‌for‌ ‌family‌ ‌and‌ ‌friends.I‌ ‌

think‌ ‌I‌ ‌will‌ ‌continue‌ ‌my‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

future.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌asking‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answering‌ ‌the‌ ‌question‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌asks‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

question:‌ ‌

 ‌S1:‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌

 ‌S2:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌….‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise:‌ ‌D‌ ‌1,2,3‌ ‌workbook‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:7A……………..‌ ‌

7B……………..‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌7:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌‌ ‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌general‌ ‌and‌ ‌specific‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌an‌ ‌unusual‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Write‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Hobbies,‌ ‌Action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌review‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌ ‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book‌.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Chatting:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌do‌ ‌with‌ ‌bottles,‌ ‌cans,‌ ‌tins‌ ‌

after‌ ‌using‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌anything‌ ‌about‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌

glass‌ ‌bottles?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌good‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌Why‌ ‌?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation.‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌an‌ ‌interview‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌blank‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

word‌ ‌web‌ ‌with‌ ‌no‌ ‌more‌ ‌than‌ ‌three‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Pre-‌ ‌listening:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌Mi’s‌ ‌

hobby‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌and‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌web.‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌Mi’s‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌(name‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobby)‌ ‌

+‌ ‌When‌ ‌did‌ ‌she‌ ‌start‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌

+Who‌ ‌shares‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌with‌ ‌Mi?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌To‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌what‌ ‌does‌ ‌Mi‌ ‌have‌ ‌to?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌How‌ ‌does‌ ‌she‌ ‌feel‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Does‌ ‌she‌ ‌intend‌ ‌to‌ ‌continue‌ ‌her‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌future?‌ ‌

*‌ ‌While‌ ‌–‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌You‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌an‌ ‌interview‌ ‌

about‌ ‌Mi’s‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌

web.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌each‌ ‌other‌ ‌and‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

word/phrase‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌a‌ ‌second‌ ‌time‌ ‌for‌ ‌

pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌check‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Post‌ ‌-‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌

-Tasks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌Mi’hobby.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌Her‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌glass‌ ‌

bottles...‌ ‌

1.Listening‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌glass‌ ‌bottles.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌two‌ ‌years‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌mother.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌a.‌ ‌grandmother‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌flower;lamp‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌home‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌useful‌ ‌

6.continue‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby:‌ ‌will.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌your‌ ‌classmate’s‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌

-‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌practice‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌

completethe‌ ‌word‌ ‌web.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Ss‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌

the‌ ‌word‌ ‌web.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌paragraphs‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

based‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌information‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌word‌ ‌

webs.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌one‌ ‌St‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌

on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Other‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌and‌ ‌T.‌ ‌comment‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

paragraph‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Questions:‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌When‌ ‌did‌ ‌you‌ ‌start‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Who‌ ‌shares‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌with‌ ‌you‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌what‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌to‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌How‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌feel‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌hobby?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌intend‌ ‌to‌ ‌continue‌ ‌your‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌?‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌your‌ ‌

classmate’s‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌‌Hoa‌ ‌is‌ ‌my‌ ‌classmate.‌ ‌Her‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌is‌ ‌

collecting‌ ‌glass‌ ‌bottles.‌ ‌She‌ ‌started‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobby‌ ‌a‌ ‌year‌ ‌ago....‌ ‌


-‌ ‌T‌ ‌collects‌ ‌some‌ ‌writings‌ ‌to‌ ‌correct‌ ‌at‌ ‌

home.‌ ‌


Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌‌ ‌‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise:‌ ‌E1,2‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌&‌ ‌project.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌1:‌ ‌My‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌8:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌&‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Review‌ ‌vocabulary,‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌in‌ ‌this‌ ‌unit.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌-‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌communication‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌project.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Hobbies,‌ ‌Action‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌review‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌‌ ‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids‌:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌‌ ‌textbook,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment‌:‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌an‌ ‌unusual‌ ‌

hobby‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Vocabulary.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌activity‌ ‌individually‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌and‌ ‌confirms‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Then‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌out‌ ‌loud‌ ‌

for‌ ‌other‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌the‌ ‌

hobby.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌activity‌ ‌individually‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌and‌ ‌confirms‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌activity‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌allows‌ ‌them‌ ‌5‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌to‌ ‌add‌ ‌as‌ ‌

many‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌as‌ ‌possible.‌ ‌It‌ ‌

can‌ ‌be‌ ‌a‌ ‌competition.‌ ‌The‌ ‌pair‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

most‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌wins‌ ‌and‌ ‌goes‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌

to‌ ‌write‌ ‌down‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌feedback.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌

appropriate‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌bird-watching‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌playing‌ ‌board‌ ‌games‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌arranging‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Making‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌dancimg‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Put‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌

in‌ ‌each‌ ‌blank.‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌verb.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌listens‌ ‌2.‌ ‌go‌ ‌3.‌ ‌plays‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌read‌ ‌5.‌ ‌do‌ ‌6.‌ ‌collect‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Add‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌to‌ ‌each‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌lists.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Easy‌ ‌hobbies:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌labels.‌ ‌-collectingleaves‌ ‌

-‌ ‌playing‌ ‌board‌ ‌games.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Difficult‌ ‌hobbies:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌skating‌ ‌–‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌-‌ ‌painting‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Cheap‌ ‌hobbies‌ ‌

-‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌used‌ ‌books.-‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌

leaves.‌ ‌-‌ ‌painting‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Expensive‌ ‌hobbies.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌cars‌ ‌-‌ ‌taking‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌

-‌ ‌travelling.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌or‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌each‌ ‌verb‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌confirms‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌and‌ ‌

write‌ ‌them‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌–‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Call‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌feedback.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌or‌ ‌future‌ ‌

simple‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌each‌ ‌verb‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

passage.‌ ‌

 ‌

Key.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌have‌ ‌2.‌ ‌likes‌ ‌3.‌ ‌plays‌ ‌4.‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌enjoys‌ ‌6.‌ ‌walks‌ ‌7.‌ ‌will‌ ‌join‌ ‌8.‌ ‌loves‌ ‌

9.‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌10.‌ ‌will‌ ‌read.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌Write‌ ‌true‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌about‌ ‌

yourself‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌like‌ ‌…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌enjoy…‌ ‌


 ‌

3.‌ ‌I‌ ‌love…‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌like…‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌I‌ ‌hate…‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌role‌ ‌-‌ ‌play‌ ‌to‌ ‌interview‌ ‌the‌ ‌other‌ ‌about‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌and‌ ‌understand‌ ‌

four‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌book‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌project.‌ ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌One‌ ‌student‌ ‌

interviews‌ ‌the‌ ‌other‌ ‌about‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌hobby.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌pairsto‌ ‌act‌ ‌out‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview‌ ‌

in‌ ‌front‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.Vote‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌

interview.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌‌Collage:‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌art‌ ‌of‌ ‌making‌ ‌a‌ ‌picture‌ ‌

by‌ ‌ticking‌ ‌pieces‌ ‌of‌ ‌colourd‌ ‌paper,‌ ‌cloth,‌ ‌

or‌ ‌photographs‌ ‌on‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌surface.It‌ ‌can‌ ‌also‌ ‌

a‌ ‌picture‌ ‌that‌ ‌you‌ ‌make‌ ‌by‌ ‌doing‌ ‌this.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌four‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌book.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌group‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌project.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Role-‌ ‌play‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

Hobby‌ ‌collage.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Review‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌1.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌9:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌Started‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Use‌ ‌“have‌ ‌a/‌ ‌an;‌ ‌feel”‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌problems.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌more‌ ‌and‌ ‌less;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌‌ ‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids‌:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials‌:‌ ‌textbook,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment‌:‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker.‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Give‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic:‌ ‌Health.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Brainstorming:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌‘HEALTH’‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌askes‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌call‌ ‌out‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌

health.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌brainstorm‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌list.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Strong‌ ‌sick‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌question:‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌can‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌time‌ ‌is‌ ‌it‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌the‌ ‌people‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

picture‌ ‌are‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Who‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌is‌ ‌healthier‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌question‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌and‌ ‌has‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

follow‌ ‌along.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌may‌ ‌track‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌

with‌ ‌their‌ ‌fingers‌ ‌as‌ ‌they‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

recording.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌elicits‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

-‌ ‌down‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌buồn,‌ ‌thất‌ ‌vọng.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌junk‌ ‌food‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌đồ‌ ‌ăn‌ ‌nhanh,‌ ‌đồ‌ ‌ăn‌ ‌vặt‌ ‌

-‌ ‌put‌ ‌on‌ ‌weight‌ ‌:‌ ‌tăng‌ ‌cân‌ ‌

-‌ ‌flu‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌bệnh‌ ‌cúm‌ ‌

-‌ ‌sunburn‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌bị‌ ‌cháy‌ ‌nắng‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌

exercise.‌ ‌

a.T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌

individually‌ ‌.T‌ ‌checks.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

b.T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌

again‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌by‌ ‌asking‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌column.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌spots‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌mụn‌ ‌nhọt‌ ‌

-‌ ‌allergy‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌dị‌ ‌ứng‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1a.‌ ‌Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌find‌ ‌a‌ ‌word‌ ‌or‌ ‌phrase‌ ‌

that‌ ‌mean:‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Zooniverse‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌feel‌ ‌like‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌sound‌ ‌down‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌putting‌ ‌on‌ ‌weight‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌won’t‌ ‌take‌ ‌no‌ ‌for‌ ‌an‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌again.‌ ‌Who‌ ‌

wants‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌things?‌ ‌

 ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Phong‌2.‌ ‌Phong‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Nick‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Nick‌5.‌ ‌Phong‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌SS‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌problems‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌As‌ ‌a‌ ‌

class‌ ‌Sscan‌ ‌call‌ ‌out‌ ‌which‌ ‌word‌ ‌they‌ ‌

think‌ ‌matches‌ ‌each‌ ‌picture.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌below‌ ‌each‌ ‌

picture.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌then‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌rank‌ ‌the‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌

from‌ ‌most‌ ‌common‌ ‌to‌ ‌least‌ ‌common‌ ‌and‌ ‌

share‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌matching‌ ‌

activity‌ ‌individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌

activity‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌a)‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌health‌ ‌issuses‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

box‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌

repeat.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌e‌ ‌2.‌ ‌f‌ ‌3.‌ ‌d‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌c‌ ‌5.‌ ‌b‌ ‌6.‌ ‌a‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

b.‌ ‌Which‌ ‌problems‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌are‌ ‌the‌ ‌

most‌ ‌common‌ ‌with‌ ‌your‌ ‌classmates?‌ ‌

1,‌ ‌Flu‌ ‌

2,….‌ ‌

3,…..‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Now‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌The‌ ‌people‌ ‌

have‌ ‌the‌ ‌wrong‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌

matchthe‌ ‌correct‌ ‌advice‌ ‌with‌ ‌each‌ ‌

person.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌c‌ ‌2.‌ ‌d‌ ‌3.‌ ‌e‌ ‌4.b‌ ‌5.a‌ ‌


 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌practise‌ ‌about‌ ‌real‌ ‌situation‌ ‌about‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌

Game‌ ‌

T‌ ‌makes‌ ‌cards‌ ‌with‌ ‌problems‌ ‌and‌ ‌

advice.T‌ ‌divided‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌two‌ ‌

groups‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌one‌ ‌group‌ ‌“problem‌ ‌”‌ ‌

cards‌ ‌and‌ ‌one‌ ‌group‌ ‌“advice‌ ‌”‌ ‌cards.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌walk‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌their‌ ‌

cards‌ ‌to‌ ‌each‌ ‌other‌ ‌and‌ ‌stand‌ ‌next‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

person‌ ‌who‌ ‌has‌ ‌the‌ ‌matching‌ ‌advice‌ ‌or‌ ‌

problem‌ ‌card.‌ ‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Game‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌spots.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Oh,‌ ‌I’m‌ ‌sorry.‌ ‌My‌ ‌advice‌ ‌is‌ ‌“‌ ‌Wear‌ ‌a‌ ‌

sun‌ ‌hat”/‌ ‌Yes!‌ ‌My‌ ‌advice‌ ‌is‌ ‌“‌ ‌Wash‌ ‌your‌ ‌

face‌ ‌regularly.”‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌10:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Use‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Pronounce‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌‌/f/‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌‌/v/‌‌ ‌correctly.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Pronunciation:‌‌ ‌‌/f/‌ ‌-‌ ‌/v/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌previous‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌health‌ ‌living.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌divides‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌two‌ ‌groups‌ ‌and‌ ‌

each‌ ‌group‌ ‌gives‌ ‌“problem”‌ ‌and‌ ‌other‌ ‌

group‌ ‌gives‌ ‌“advice”‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

G1:‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌spots.‌ ‌

G2:‌ ‌Yes!‌ ‌My‌ ‌advice‌ ‌is‌ ‌“Wash‌ ‌your‌ ‌face‌ ‌

regularly”‌ ‌

*Game‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/f/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/v/‌ ‌correctly.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌start‌ ‌by‌ ‌drilling‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sounds‌ ‌/f/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/v/‌ ‌and‌ ‌asking‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌

of‌ ‌any‌ ‌words‌ ‌they‌ ‌know‌ ‌with‌ ‌these‌ ‌souns‌ ‌

in‌ ‌them.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌write‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌Then,‌ ‌

T‌ ‌says‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌5‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

repeat.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌circle‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words‌ ‌they‌ ‌hear.‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌play‌ ‌the‌ ‌

recording‌ ‌as‌ ‌many‌ ‌times‌ ‌as‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌once‌ ‌

and‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌/f/‌ ‌or‌ ‌/v/‌ ‌

sounds.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌

and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

entire‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Pronunciation‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌you‌ ‌

hear.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌fat‌ ‌2.‌ ‌ferry‌3.‌ ‌vas‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌vault‌5.‌ ‌save‌6.‌ ‌leave‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌

the‌ ‌/f/or‌ ‌/v/‌ ‌sound.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌say‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Fast,‌ ‌food‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌have,‌ ‌felt‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌fatter‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌having,‌ ‌lifestyle‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌give‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living‌ ‌to‌ ‌

do‌ ‌exerise.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌explains‌ ‌them‌ ‌

by‌ ‌the‌ ‌active.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌each‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌different‌ ‌health‌ ‌

problems.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌stomachache.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌practice‌ ‌each‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

different‌ ‌health‌ ‌problems‌ ‌by‌ ‌the‌ ‌active.‌ ‌

For‌ ‌Example:‌ ‌‘‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌cough’‌ ‌ ‌

(Ss‌ ‌pretend‌ ‌to‌ ‌cough)‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌noun‌ ‌‘patient’‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌

sure‌ ‌that‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌are‌ ‌familiar‌ ‌with‌ ‌it.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌one‌ ‌student‌ ‌to‌ ‌come‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌front‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌models‌ ‌the‌ ‌role-‌ ‌play‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌book‌ ‌with‌ ‌

the‌ ‌student.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌come‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌front‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌

Have‌ ‌a/‌ ‌an:‌ ‌‌cough,‌ ‌headache,‌ ‌sorethroat,‌ ‌

temprature,‌ ‌an‌ ‌allergy,‌ ‌a‌ ‌spot,‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌

sunburn,‌ ‌a‌ ‌sickness…..‌ ‌

Have:‌ ‌(the)‌ ‌flu,‌ ‌stomachache,‌ ‌toothache,‌ ‌

earache,‌ ‌spots……‌ ‌

Feel‌:‌ ‌sick,‌ ‌tired,‌ ‌weak,……‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

problem‌ ‌below‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌each‌ ‌

patient‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Flu‌2.‌ ‌Sunburn‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Allergy‌4.‌ ‌Tired/Weak‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Now,‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌doctor’s‌ ‌notes‌ ‌

about‌ ‌his‌ ‌patients‌ ‌and‌ ‌fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌missing‌ ‌

words.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌sunburn‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌the‌ ‌flu‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌tired,‌ ‌temperature‌ ‌

4.sick,‌ ‌stomachache‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌sore‌ ‌throat‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Role-play‌ ‌the‌ ‌meeting‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

doctor.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌


-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌practice‌ ‌their‌ ‌role-plays.‌ ‌

Some‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌perform‌ ‌their‌ ‌role-plays‌ ‌for‌ ‌

the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌After‌ ‌each‌ ‌role-play‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class‌ ‌comprehension‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌

what‌ ‌they‌ ‌just‌ ‌saw.‌ ‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌‌What‌ ‌was‌ ‌Mai’s‌ ‌problem?‌ ‌What‌ ‌

advice‌ ‌did‌ ‌Dr.‌ ‌Thao‌ ‌have?‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Hi,‌ ‌doctor‌ ‌Thao.‌ ‌

Hi,‌ ‌Hung‌ ‌

I‌ ‌was‌ ‌outside‌ ‌all‌ ‌day‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌

very‌ ‌hot‌ ‌and‌ ‌my‌ ‌face‌ ‌is‌ ‌red.‌ ‌

I‌ ‌see.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌sunburn.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌give‌ ‌a‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌advice‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌four‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌model‌ ‌the‌ ‌example‌ ‌

convesation.‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌extend‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conversation‌ ‌by‌ ‌trying‌ ‌to‌ ‌figure‌ ‌out‌ ‌what‌ ‌

the‌ ‌most‌ ‌common‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌is‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌group‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌report‌ ‌back‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌a‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌

groups.‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌your‌ ‌group‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌last‌ ‌

time‌ ‌you‌ ‌had‌ ‌that‌ ‌problem.‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌A:‌ ‌I‌ ‌had‌ ‌flu‌ ‌two‌ ‌weeks‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Me‌ ‌too,‌ ‌I‌ ‌felt‌ ‌so‌ ‌weak.‌ ‌

C:‌ ‌Oh.‌ ‌I‌ ‌had‌ ‌a‌ ‌sore‌ ‌throat‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌

 ‌D:‌ ‌I‌ ‌had‌ ‌toothache.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌I‌ ‌ate‌ ‌too‌ ‌

many‌ ‌sweets.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌11:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Use‌ ‌imperatives‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Form‌ ‌compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌them‌ ‌correctly.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Teacher‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌workbook‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌&‌ ‌Students'‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Do‌ ‌some‌ ‌simple‌ ‌classroom‌ ‌commands.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌some‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

classroom‌ ‌commands.‌ ‌

Eg:‌‌ ‌Stand‌ ‌up,‌ ‌sit‌ ‌down,‌ ‌raise‌ ‌your‌ ‌hand,‌ ‌

Open‌ ‌your‌ ‌book,‌ ‌close‌ ‌your‌ ‌book...‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌commend‌ ‌as‌ ‌the‌ ‌T‌ ‌says‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation.‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌Imperatives‌ ‌with‌ ‌more‌ ‌and‌ ‌less‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌some‌ ‌example‌ ‌and‌ ‌explains‌ ‌to‌ ‌

chidren‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌imperative.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌use:‌ ‌We‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌

imperative‌ ‌for‌ ‌direct‌ ‌commands,‌ ‌orders‌ ‌or‌ ‌

suggestions.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌sts‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌imperative‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

yellow‌ ‌box.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌comprehension‌ ‌by‌ ‌‌asking‌ ‌

some‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌When‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌tired‌ ‌should‌ ‌I‌ ‌sleep‌ ‌more‌ ‌or‌ ‌

less‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-What‌ ‌should‌ ‌I‌ ‌do‌ ‌If‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌lose‌ ‌weight‌ ‌

?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌should‌ ‌I‌ ‌do‌ ‌If‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌get‌ ‌a‌ ‌good‌ ‌

mark?‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌four‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌to‌ ‌each‌ ‌

person‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Imperatives‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌more‌ ‌exercise.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Watch‌ ‌less‌ ‌TV.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Câu‌ ‌mệnh‌ ‌lệnh‌ ‌dùng‌ ‌để‌ ‌hướng‌ ‌dẫn,‌ ‌

ra‌ ‌lệnh,‌ ‌yêu‌ ‌cầu‌ ‌hoặc‌ ‌gợi‌ ‌ý.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌Which‌ ‌

advice‌ ‌would‌ ‌you‌ ‌give‌ ‌to‌ ‌each‌ ‌of‌ ‌these‌ ‌

people?‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌imperatives‌ ‌with‌ ‌more‌ ‌

or‌ ‌less‌ ‌above.‌ ‌

Suggested‌ ‌answers:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌sleep‌ ‌more‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌yellow‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

Box‌ ‌again.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌about‌ ‌6‌ ‌most‌ ‌important‌ ‌

advice‌ ‌to‌ ‌teens.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌through‌ ‌the‌ ‌‌Teen‌ ‌Health‌ ‌

Website‌ ‌‌individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

headings.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

b.‌ ‌Spend‌ ‌less‌ ‌time‌ ‌playing‌ ‌computure‌ ‌

games‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌do‌ ‌more‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

d.‌ ‌sunbathe‌ ‌less‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Top‌ ‌Health‌ ‌Tips‌ ‌for‌ ‌Teens‌ ‌

Ss’‌ ‌ideas.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:Fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blanks‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌

their‌ ‌top‌ ‌six‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌more‌ ‌exercise!‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Sleep‌ ‌more!‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Eat‌ ‌less‌ ‌junk‌ ‌food‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Wash‌ ‌your‌ ‌hands‌ ‌more.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Watch‌ ‌less‌ ‌TV‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Spend‌ ‌less‌ ‌time‌ ‌playing‌ ‌computer‌ ‌

games.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌‌ ‌‌the‌‌ ‌‌form‌ ‌compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌them‌ ‌correctly.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌ways‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conjunction‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌example.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌AND,‌ ‌OR,‌ ‌BUT,‌ ‌and‌ ‌SO‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌what‌ ‌these‌ ‌words‌ ‌are‌ ‌

called.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌conjunction‌ ‌(Ss‌ ‌may‌ ‌answer‌ ‌in‌ ‌

English‌ ‌or‌ ‌Vietnamese).‌ ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

Conjunction‌ ‌(liên‌ ‌từ):‌ ‌‌and,‌ ‌or,‌ ‌but,‌ ‌so.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌I‌ ‌like‌ ‌fish‌ ‌and‌ ‌chicken.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌‌1.‌ ‌

‌‌Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌eat‌ ‌some‌ ‌food,‌ ‌but‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌

sore‌ ‌throat.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌Japanese‌ ‌eat‌ ‌healthily,‌ ‌so‌ ‌they‌ ‌

live‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌long‌ ‌time.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌tired,‌ ‌and‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌weak.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌You‌ ‌can‌ ‌go‌ ‌and‌ ‌see‌ ‌the‌ ‌doctor,‌ ‌or‌ ‌

you‌ ‌can‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌bed‌ ‌now‌ ‌and‌ ‌rest.‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌quotes‌ ‌aloud.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

asks‌ ‌comprehension‌ ‌questions‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌

sure‌ ‌that‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌dicuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌similarities‌ ‌and‌ ‌

differences‌ ‌of‌ ‌quotes.‌ ‌For‌ ‌less‌ ‌able‌ ‌

classes,‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌lead‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conversation‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌if‌ ‌

they‌ ‌can‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌any‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌

proverbs‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌similar‌ ‌meaning.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌beginnings‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌that‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌a‌2.c‌3.a‌4.b‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌6.‌ ‌Now,‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌second‌ ‌part‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌compound‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1,‌ ‌so‌ ‌he‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌have‌ ‌flu.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌,‌ ‌and‌ ‌he‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌,‌ ‌or‌ ‌she‌ ‌should‌ ‌try‌ ‌to‌ ‌relax‌ ‌more.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌,‌ ‌she‌ ‌does‌ ‌exercise,‌ ‌too.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌real‌ ‌situations‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌real‌ ‌

situations‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌real‌ ‌situations‌ ‌

T‌ ‌correct‌ ‌the‌ ‌mistakes‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Communication.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌12:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌facts‌ ‌or‌ ‌

myths.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Teacher‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌workbook‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌imperatives.‌ ‌

Brainstorming:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌Healthy‌ ‌and‌ ‌

Unhealthy‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌class‌ ‌brainstroms‌ ‌about‌ ‌things‌ ‌that‌ ‌

are‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌or‌ ‌unhealty.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌Stay‌ ‌up‌ ‌late‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabularies‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

EXTRA‌ ‌VOCABULARY‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌pre-teaches‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Extra‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌Box‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

Myth‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌huyền‌ ‌thoại,‌ ‌việc‌ ‌hoang‌ ‌

đường‌ ‌

Sushi‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌su-‌ ‌si‌ ‌

Vitamin‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌Vitamin‌ ‌

Sleeping‌ ‌in‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌ngủ‌ ‌nhiều‌ ‌

Vegetarian‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌Người‌ ‌ăn‌ ‌chay‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌groups‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌divides‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌into‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks‌ ‌

them‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌by‌ ‌ticking‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌they‌ ‌think‌ ‌are‌ ‌true‌ ‌and‌ ‌

Ex1.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌these‌ ‌

sentences.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

putting‌ ‌a‌ ‌cross‌ ‌next‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌they‌ ‌

think‌ ‌are‌ ‌F‌ ‌or‌ ‌M.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌2-3‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌

the‌ ‌exercise.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌chooses‌ ‌a‌ ‌few‌ ‌groups‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌close‌ ‌their‌ ‌books,‌ ‌listen,‌ ‌

and‌ ‌take‌ ‌notes.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌then‌ ‌open‌ ‌their‌ ‌books‌ ‌and‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌using‌ ‌their‌ ‌notes‌ ‌(or‌ ‌from‌ ‌

memory).‌ ‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs,‌ ‌as‌ ‌

suggested‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌student’s‌ ‌book.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌divides‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌into‌ ‌groups‌ ‌and‌ ‌has‌ ‌them‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise.‌ ‌T‌ ‌sets‌ ‌a‌ ‌time‌ ‌

limit.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌M‌2.M‌3.F‌4.F‌5.F‌6.F‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌radio‌ ‌show‌ ‌about‌ ‌

health‌ ‌facts‌ ‌or‌ ‌myth’s”‌ ‌and‌ ‌check‌ ‌

your‌ ‌answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌take‌ ‌notes.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Which‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌are‌ ‌you‌ ‌most‌ ‌

surprised‌ ‌by?‌ ‌Why?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌any‌ ‌health‌ ‌facts‌ ‌or‌ ‌

myths‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam?‌ ‌

Where‌ ‌did‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear‌ ‌them?‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌some‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌that‌ ‌are‌ ‌true‌ ‌


Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌When‌ ‌the‌ ‌time‌ ‌limit‌ ‌for‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌4‌ ‌

is‌ ‌finished‌ ‌T‌ ‌puts‌ ‌groups‌ ‌together‌ ‌to‌ ‌

quiz‌ ‌one‌ ‌another.‌ ‌In‌ ‌order‌ ‌to‌ ‌keep‌ ‌things‌ ‌

organised,‌ ‌each‌ ‌group‌ ‌chooses‌ ‌one‌ ‌

spokesperson‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌group.‌ ‌The‌ ‌

spokesperson‌ ‌can‌ ‌consult‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌group,‌ ‌

but‌ ‌the‌ ‌spokesperson‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌only‌ ‌one‌ ‌

who‌ ‌can‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌When‌ ‌the‌ ‌time‌ ‌limit‌ ‌for‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌4‌ ‌

is‌ ‌finished‌ ‌T‌ ‌puts‌ ‌groups‌ ‌together‌ ‌to‌ ‌

quiz‌ ‌one‌ ‌another.‌ ‌In‌ ‌order‌ ‌to‌ ‌keep‌ ‌things‌ ‌

organised,‌ ‌each‌ ‌group‌ ‌chooses‌ ‌one‌ ‌

spokesperson‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌group.‌ ‌The‌ ‌

spokesperson‌ ‌can‌ ‌consult‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌group,‌ ‌

but‌ ‌the‌ ‌spokesperson‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌only‌ ‌one‌ ‌

who‌ ‌can‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌Think‌ ‌of‌ ‌some‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌that‌ ‌are‌ ‌not‌ ‌

true.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌some‌ ‌that‌ ‌are‌ ‌

fasle.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌You‌ ‌can‌ ‌avoid‌ ‌some‌ ‌disease‌ ‌by‌ ‌

keeping‌ ‌yourself‌ ‌clean‌ ‌(true)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌You‌ ‌will‌ ‌turn‌ ‌when‌ ‌you‌ ‌eat‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌

oranges‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Test‌ ‌another‌ ‌group‌ ‌to‌ ‌see‌ ‌how‌ ‌

many‌ ‌of‌ ‌your‌ ‌health‌ ‌myths‌ ‌they‌ ‌can‌ ‌

spot.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌13:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌and‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌

issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌‌ ‌‌word‌ ‌CALORIE‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌CALORIE‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌brainstorms‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌any‌ ‌words‌ ‌

that‌ ‌they‌ ‌associate‌ ‌with‌ ‌CALORIE.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Food,‌ ‌drink…‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Pre-‌ ‌reading:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌what‌ ‌the‌ ‌

reading‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌about.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌guess.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌While‌ ‌–‌ ‌reading.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌do.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks.‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌ex2.(Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌dictionaries‌ ‌)‌ ‌

T‌ ‌elicits‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌words‌ ‌from‌ ‌

different‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Quickly‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌headings‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌paragraphs‌.‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌b,2.‌ ‌a,3.‌ ‌c‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Find‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌text.‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌each‌ ‌

word/‌ ‌phrase‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌check‌ ‌

the‌ ‌meaning.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Essential‌ ‌-‌ ‌necessary‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Pay‌ ‌attention‌ ‌-‌ ‌notice,‌ ‌be‌ ‌aware‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Diet‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌food‌ ‌that‌ ‌you‌ ‌eat‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌

daily‌ ‌basis.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Diet‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌-‌ ‌meant‌ ‌a‌ ‌special‌ ‌eating‌ ‌

routine‌ ‌to‌ ‌lose‌ ‌weight‌ ‌or‌ ‌accomplish‌ ‌

another‌ ‌health‌ ‌goal.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Expert‌ ‌-‌ ‌someone‌ ‌who‌ ‌has‌ ‌studied‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌

about‌ ‌a‌ ‌subject‌ ‌or‌ ‌topic‌ ‌and‌ ‌ ‌

understands‌ ‌it‌ ‌well.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌activity‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌ndividually.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Post‌ ‌–‌ ‌reading:‌ ‌

(Ss‌ ‌try‌ ‌to‌ ‌remember‌ ‌the‌ ‌contents‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

text‌ ‌–‌ ‌do‌ ‌at‌ ‌home‌ ‌)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Stay‌ ‌in‌ ‌shape‌ ‌-‌ ‌stay‌ ‌healthy.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Now‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌calorie‌ ‌is‌ ‌energy‌ ‌that‌ ‌helps‌ ‌us‌ ‌do‌ ‌our‌ ‌

everyday‌ ‌activities.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌If‌ ‌we‌ ‌eat‌ ‌too‌ ‌many‌ ‌calories‌ ‌we‌ ‌get‌ ‌fat.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌To‌ ‌stay‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌you‌ ‌need‌ ‌between‌ ‌1,600‌ ‌

and‌ ‌2,500‌ ‌calories.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Sports‌ ‌activities‌ ‌and‌ ‌running‌ ‌use‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌

of‌ ‌calories.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌People‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌his‌ ‌advice‌ ‌because‌ ‌he‌ ‌is‌ ‌

an‌ ‌expert.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌draws‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌

explains‌ ‌that‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌are‌ ‌listed‌ ‌next‌ ‌

to‌ ‌the‌ ‌number‌ ‌of‌ ‌calories‌ ‌used‌ ‌in‌ ‌one‌ ‌

hour.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌puts‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs,‌ ‌or‌ ‌groups‌ ‌of‌ ‌three‌ ‌and‌ ‌

asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌walks‌ ‌around‌ ‌the‌ ‌room‌ ‌monitoring.‌ ‌

When‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌have‌ ‌finished‌ ‌discussing‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌move‌ ‌on‌ ‌to‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌5.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌think‌ ‌

about‌ ‌how‌ ‌many‌ ‌calories‌ ‌each‌ ‌activity‌ ‌

will‌ ‌take.‌ ‌If‌ ‌the‌ ‌activity‌ ‌they‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌is‌ ‌

not‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌guess‌ ‌the‌ ‌number‌ ‌

of‌ ‌calories‌ ‌by‌ ‌comparing‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌4.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌table‌ ‌with‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Speaking‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌questions‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌our‌ ‌bodies‌ ‌need‌ ‌them‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Gardening‌ ‌uses‌ ‌more‌ ‌calories‌ ‌than‌ ‌

walking.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌two‌ ‌or‌ ‌three‌ ‌activities‌ ‌you‌ ‌

like‌ ‌to‌ ‌do.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌chart‌ ‌about‌ ‌

those‌ ‌activities.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌activities‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌every‌ ‌day‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌activities‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌

every‌ ‌day‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Present‌ ‌your‌ ‌chart‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

Ss’‌ ‌performances.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌14:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌reply‌ ‌

giving‌ ‌advice‌ ‌to‌ ‌someone‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Teacher‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌on‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌living‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌answer‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem.‌ ‌

T:‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

-What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌do‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌free‌ ‌time‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌playing‌ ‌sports?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Which‌ ‌sports‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌play‌ ‌?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation.‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview‌ ‌with‌ ‌an‌ ‌ironman‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Pre-‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Olympic‌ ‌rings.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌by‌ ‌answering‌ ‌

some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌While-‌ ‌Listening.‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌

circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌they‌ ‌hear.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌

and‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌respond.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌key.‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌

and‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌respond.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌an‌ ‌early‌ ‌finisher‌ ‌to‌ ‌come‌ ‌up‌ ‌to‌ ‌

the‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌can‌ ‌check‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Post-‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌divides‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌groups‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌

them‌ ‌a‌ ‌time‌ ‌limit‌ ‌for‌ ‌discussion‌ ‌and‌ ‌

feedback‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌their‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌below.‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌

the‌ ‌following‌ ‌questions‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview.‌ ‌Which‌ ‌

problems‌ ‌did‌ ‌he‌ ‌have‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌child?‌ ‌

 ‌

-sick‌ ‌

-allergy‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview‌ ‌again.‌ ‌What‌ ‌

advice‌ ‌does‌ ‌he‌ ‌give‌ ‌about‌ ‌preparing‌ ‌for‌ ‌

the‌ ‌event?‌ ‌

-Do‌ ‌more‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

-Sleep‌ ‌more‌ ‌

-Eat‌ ‌more‌ ‌fruit/‌ ‌vegetables‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Are‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌true‌ ‌

(T)‌ ‌or‌ ‌false‌ ‌(F)‌ ‌

 ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌T‌ ‌2.‌ ‌F‌ ‌3.‌ ‌F‌ ‌4.‌ ‌F‌ ‌5.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Why‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌triathlon‌ ‌a‌ ‌difficult‌ ‌event?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌other‌ ‌Olympic‌ ‌sports‌ ‌

that‌ ‌are‌ ‌harder/‌ ‌easier?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌try‌ ‌the‌ ‌triathlon‌ ‌one‌ ‌

day?‌ ‌Why?‌ ‌Why‌ ‌not?‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌‌ ‌‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌reply‌ ‌giving‌ ‌advice‌ ‌to‌ ‌someone‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌6‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌problems‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌structure‌ ‌about‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

*‌ ‌New‌ ‌word.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Dry:‌ ‌khô‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Burger‌ ‌:‌ ‌bánh‌ ‌mì‌ ‌kẹp‌ ‌thịt.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Chips:‌ ‌khoai‌ ‌tây‌ ‌chiên.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Maintain:‌ ‌duy‌ ‌trì‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌problems‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌

1.c‌ ‌2.b‌ ‌3.a‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌7.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌again.‌ ‌

Underline‌ ‌the‌ ‌ways‌ ‌Dr.‌ ‌Dan‌ ‌gives‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌divides‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌into‌ ‌A‌ ‌and‌ ‌B‌ ‌then‌ ‌put‌ ‌them‌ ‌

in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌one‌ ‌student‌ ‌A‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌

health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌piece‌ ‌of‌ ‌paper‌ ‌(‌ ‌using‌ ‌

the‌ ‌frompts‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌book),‌ ‌T‌ ‌then‌ ‌asks‌ ‌

Student‌ ‌A‌ ‌to‌ ‌pass‌ ‌the‌ ‌paper‌ ‌to‌ ‌Student‌ ‌B‌ ‌

and‌ ‌Student‌ ‌B‌ ‌can‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌response.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Share‌ ‌their‌ ‌questions‌ ‌and‌ ‌responses‌ ‌with‌ ‌

the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

You‌ ‌should…‌ ‌

You‌ ‌can…‌ ‌

It‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌good‌ ‌if‌ ‌you…‌ ‌

Do‌ ‌something‌ ‌more/‌ ‌less…‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌8.‌ ‌Now‌ ‌,‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner‌ ‌choose‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌following‌ ‌problems….‌ ‌

Anna:‌ ‌played‌ ‌outside‌ ‌all‌ ‌day/‌ ‌has‌ ‌sunburn/‌ ‌

has‌ ‌a‌ ‌temprerature‌ ‌

Ngoc:‌ ‌feels‌ ‌weak/‌ ‌feel‌ ‌tired/‌ ‌sleeps‌ ‌in‌ ‌

Khang:‌ ‌ate‌ ‌too‌ ‌much/‌ ‌has‌ ‌stomachache/‌ ‌

feels‌ ‌sick.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌activites‌ ‌about‌ ‌keeping‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

A:What‌ ‌should‌ ‌we‌ ‌do‌ ‌to‌ ‌keep‌ ‌health?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌I‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌to‌ ‌keep‌ ‌fit‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌&‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌2:‌ ‌HEALTH‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌15:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌and‌ ‌project‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Review‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌and‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌items‌ ‌in‌ ‌unit‌ ‌2‌ ‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Do‌ ‌a‌ ‌health‌ ‌survey‌.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌health‌ ‌problem‌ ‌and‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌importance‌ ‌of‌ ‌staying‌ ‌their‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌

way‌ ‌to‌ ‌protect‌ ‌their‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Teacher‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌previous‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌name‌ ‌the‌ ‌health‌ ‌problems‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌

-‌T‌ ‌asks:‌ ‌‌What‌ ‌can‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌

picture?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌health‌ ‌

problem.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌sts‌ ‌give‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌spots‌ ‌2.‌ ‌put‌ ‌on‌ ‌weight‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌sunburn‌ ‌4.‌ ‌stomachche/‌ ‌sick‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌flu‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Review‌ ‌grammar:‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌‌more‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌less‌;‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌complete‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌or‌ ‌

in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌should‌ ‌be‌ ‌encouraged‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌

down‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌correct‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌

to‌ ‌check‌ ‌spelling.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

Health‌ ‌issues‌ ‌and‌ ‌advice‌ ‌

1‌.‌ ‌What‌ ‌health‌ ‌problems‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌each‌ ‌

of‌ ‌these‌ ‌people‌ ‌has?‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌sunburn‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌spots‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌put‌ ‌on‌ ‌weight‌ ‌ ‌

d.‌ ‌stomachche‌ ‌

e.‌ ‌flu‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

Imperatives‌ ‌with‌ ‌more‌ ‌or‌ ‌less.‌ ‌

3‌.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌health‌ ‌tips‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌less‌ ‌2.‌ ‌more‌3.‌ ‌more‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Go‌ ‌outside…‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Watch‌ ‌less‌ ‌TV…‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌more‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Draw‌ ‌a‌ ‌line‌ ‌to‌ ‌link‌ ‌a‌ ‌simple‌ ‌sentence,‌ ‌

to‌ ‌a‌ ‌coordinator,‌ ‌to‌ ‌another‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

sentence.‌ ‌

Suggested‌ ‌answers:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌eat‌ ‌some‌ ‌junk‌ ‌food,‌ ‌but‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌

putting‌ ‌on‌ ‌weight.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌be‌ ‌tired‌ ‌tomorrow,‌ ‌so‌ ‌I‌ ‌

should‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌bed‌ ‌early.‌ ‌

3.I‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌temperature,‌ ‌and‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌tired.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌every‌ ‌morning,‌ ‌or‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌

cycle‌ ‌to‌ ‌school.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌about‌ ‌health‌ ‌problem.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌divide‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌into‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌one‌ ‌pair‌ ‌to‌ ‌come‌ ‌up‌ ‌and‌ ‌

role-play‌ ‌the‌ ‌example‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌book.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌choose‌ ‌a‌ ‌pair‌ ‌or‌ ‌two‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌their‌ ‌

role‌ ‌–‌ ‌plays‌ ‌in‌ ‌front‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌remain‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌as‌ ‌in‌ ‌

exercise‌ ‌5‌ ‌and‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌6.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌set‌ ‌a‌ ‌time‌ ‌limit‌ ‌and‌ ‌after‌ ‌a‌ ‌few‌ ‌

minutes‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌report‌ ‌back‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

III-‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

5‌.Choose‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌health‌ ‌

problems.‌ ‌Role‌ ‌play‌ ‌a‌ ‌discussion.‌ ‌Student‌ ‌

A‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌patient.‌ ‌Student‌ ‌B‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌doctor.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Hi,‌ ‌doctor.‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌weak‌ ‌and‌ ‌sick.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Did‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌enough‌ ‌calories?‌ ‌You‌ ‌

should‌ ‌eat‌ ‌more,‌ ‌and‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌you‌ ‌should‌ ‌

get‌ ‌more‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌too.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌OK.‌ ‌Thank‌ ‌you‌ ‌doctor‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌about‌ ‌

health‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌they‌ ‌

are‌ ‌facts‌ ‌or‌ ‌myths?‌ ‌

 ‌


The‌ ‌class‌ ‌can‌ ‌decide‌ ‌what’s‌ ‌true‌ ‌and‌ ‌

what’s‌ ‌a‌ ‌myth.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

This‌ ‌project‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌done‌ ‌as‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

the‌ ‌groups‌ ‌should‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌health‌ ‌

problems‌ ‌they‌ ‌discovered‌ ‌and‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌

would‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌to‌ ‌fix‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌When‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌headache,‌ ‌you‌ ‌

should‌ ‌rub‌ ‌an‌ ‌egg‌ ‌on‌ ‌your‌ ‌head.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌think‌ ‌this‌ ‌is‌ ‌true.‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌a‌ ‌myths.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌I‌ ‌agree/‌ ‌No,‌ ‌I‌ ‌disagree…..‌ ‌

 ‌

IV.‌ ‌Project‌ ‌ ‌

(do‌ ‌at‌ ‌home‌ ‌)‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌project‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌3‌ ‌-‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE.‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌16:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌

service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

Check‌ ‌15‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌

 ‌

Code‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌option‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Peter‌ ‌enjoys‌ ‌___________.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌garden‌B.‌ ‌gardener‌C.‌ ‌gardening‌D.‌ ‌to‌ ‌garden‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌___________‌ ‌her‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌next‌ ‌year.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌continueing‌B.‌ ‌continues‌C.‌ ‌continue‌D.‌ ‌will‌ ‌continue‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌She‌ ‌is‌ ‌having‌ ‌______.‌ ‌She's‌ ‌hot‌ ‌and‌ ‌coughs‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌spots‌B.‌ ‌flu‌C.‌ ‌earache‌D.‌ ‌sunburn‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Jim‌ ‌finds‌ ‌bird-watching‌ ‌___________‌ ‌because‌ ‌he‌ ‌can‌ ‌learn‌ ‌about‌ ‌nature.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌interest‌B.‌ ‌interested‌C.‌ ‌interesting‌D.‌ ‌interests‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌_____________headache.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌the‌B.‌ ‌a‌C.‌ ‌an‌D.‌ ‌nothing‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌‌My‌ ‌father‌ ‌___________‌ ‌morning‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌very‌ ‌often.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌doesn't‌B.‌ ‌don’t‌C.‌ ‌don't‌ ‌do‌D.‌ ‌doesn't‌ ‌do‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌You‌ ‌should‌ ‌eat‌ ‌less‌ ‌fast‌ ‌food,‌ ‌___________you‌ ‌can‌ ‌put‌ ‌on‌ ‌weight.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌and‌B.‌ ‌but‌C.‌ ‌so‌D.‌ ‌or‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌Ngoc‌ ‌___________‌ ‌eating‌ ‌fast‌ ‌food‌ ‌because‌ ‌it’s‌ ‌not‌ ‌good‌ ‌for‌ ‌her‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌likes‌B.‌ ‌loves‌C.‌ ‌hates‌D.‌ ‌enjoys‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌‌Rearrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Amy/pottery/much/very/likes/making/.‌ ‌

………………………………………………………………………..‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌My/chess/evening/plays/me/with/sister/every/.‌ ‌

………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌option‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌drink‌ ‌a‌ ‌cold‌ ‌water,‌ ‌___________I‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌sore‌ ‌throat‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌but‌B.‌ ‌and‌C.‌ ‌or‌D.‌ ‌so‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Mike‌ ‌and‌ ‌Jack‌ ‌___________‌ ‌running‌ ‌but‌ ‌Mary‌ ‌loves‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌doesn't‌ ‌like‌B.‌ ‌don't‌ ‌like‌C.‌ ‌not‌ ‌like‌D.‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌likes‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌I‌ ‌‌___________‌ ‌playing‌ ‌board‌ ‌games‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌because‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌play‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌my‌ ‌

friends.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌think‌ ‌B.‌ ‌say‌C.‌ ‌tell‌D.‌ ‌find‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌read‌ ‌in‌ ‌bed,‌ ‌___________you‌ ‌will‌ ‌harm‌ ‌your‌ ‌eyes.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌or‌B.‌ ‌and‌C.‌ ‌but‌D.‌ ‌so‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Playing‌ ‌soccer‌ ‌is‌ ‌so‌ ‌fun!‌ ‌I‌ ‌___________‌ ‌my‌ ‌classmates‌ ‌to‌ ‌join‌ ‌me‌ ‌next‌ ‌week.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌asked‌B.‌ ‌ask‌C.‌ ‌will‌ ‌ask‌D.‌ ‌asks‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌I'm‌ ‌very‌ ‌______.‌ ‌I've‌ ‌been‌ ‌working‌ ‌all‌ ‌day.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌tired‌B.‌ ‌strong‌C.‌ ‌tiring‌D.‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌I‌ ‌______‌ ‌terrible‌ ‌toothache.‌ ‌I‌ ‌can't‌ ‌chew.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌B.‌ ‌feel‌C.‌ ‌am‌D.‌ ‌have‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌What‌ ‌___________‌ ‌your‌ ‌parents‌ ‌often‌ ‌___________‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌weekend?‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌do...do‌B.‌ ‌will...do‌C.‌ ‌does...do‌D.‌ ‌are‌ ‌……do‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌‌Rearrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌There/library/many/the/books/are/in.‌ ‌

……………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Collecting/environment/save/the/helps/bottles/glass/.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

……………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

 ‌

Code‌ ‌3.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌option‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌wants‌ ‌to‌ ‌lose‌ ‌weight,‌ ‌___________he‌ ‌began‌ ‌jogging‌ ‌last‌ ‌Sunday.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌or‌B.‌ ‌and‌C.‌ ‌but‌D.‌ ‌so‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌___________‌ ‌because‌ ‌I‌ ‌love‌ ‌watching‌ ‌plants‌ ‌growing.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌garden‌B.‌ ‌gardening‌C.‌ ‌to‌ ‌garden‌D.‌ ‌gardens‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Jenny‌ ‌___________‌ ‌fishing‌ ‌twice‌ ‌a‌ ‌week.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌go‌B.‌ ‌goes‌C.‌ ‌will‌ ‌go‌D.‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Tony‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌feel‌ ‌interested‌ ‌in‌ ‌playing‌ ‌the‌ ‌piano‌ ‌anymore,‌ ‌so‌ ‌he‌ ‌___________‌ ‌

another‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌next‌ ‌year.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌takes‌ ‌up‌B.‌ ‌taking‌ ‌up‌C.‌ ‌will‌ ‌take‌ ‌up‌D.‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌up‌ ‌

5.‌‌ ‌My‌ ‌cold‌ ‌is‌ ‌better,‌ ‌but‌ ‌I‌ ‌still‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌______.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌cough‌B.‌ ‌sick‌ ‌C.‌ ‌flu‌D.‌ ‌tired‌ ‌

6.‌‌ ‌Although‌ ‌he‌ ‌practised‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot,‌ ‌his‌ ‌legs‌ ‌still‌ ‌______‌ ‌weak.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌are‌B.‌ ‌were‌C.‌ ‌felt‌D.‌ ‌have‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌ ‌I‌ ‌‌___________‌ ‌making‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌because‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌beautiful‌ ‌things‌ ‌for‌ ‌

my‌ ‌friends.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌think‌ ‌B.‌ ‌say‌C.‌ ‌tell‌D.‌ ‌find‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌Wash‌ ‌your‌ ‌hands‌ ‌………………You‌ ‌will‌ ‌have‌ ‌less‌ ‌chance‌ ‌of‌ ‌catching‌ ‌flu.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌much‌B.‌ ‌many‌C.‌ ‌less‌D.‌ ‌more‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌‌Rearrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Be‌ ‌careful/‌ ‌what‌ ‌/with/‌ ‌you/and‌ ‌drink/‌ ‌eat/‌ ‌./‌ ‌

………………………………………………………………….‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I/because/improve/can/useful/health/soccer/I/playing/find/my/.‌ ‌

………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Keys‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌option‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌gardening‌2.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌will‌ ‌continue‌3.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌flu‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌interesting‌5.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌a‌‌6.‌ ‌‌D.‌ ‌doesn't‌ ‌do‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌or‌8.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌hates‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌‌Rearrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Amy‌ ‌likes‌ ‌making‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌very‌ ‌much‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌My‌ ‌sister‌ ‌plays‌ ‌chess‌ ‌with‌ ‌me‌ ‌every‌ ‌evening‌.‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌option‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌but‌2.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌don't‌ ‌like‌‌3.‌ ‌‌D.‌ ‌find‌4.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌or‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌will‌ ‌ask‌6.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌tired‌7.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌have‌8.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌do...do‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌‌Rearrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌There‌ ‌are‌ ‌many‌ ‌books‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌library.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Collecting‌ ‌glass‌ ‌bottles‌ ‌helps‌ ‌save‌ ‌the‌ ‌environment‌.‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌3.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌option‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌so‌2.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌gardening‌3.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌goes‌4.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌will‌ ‌take‌ ‌up‌ ‌

5.‌‌ ‌A.‌ ‌cough‌‌6.‌‌ ‌C.‌ ‌felt‌‌7.‌ ‌ ‌‌D.‌ ‌find‌8.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌more‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌‌Rearrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Be‌ ‌careful‌ ‌with‌ ‌what‌ ‌you‌ ‌eat‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌playing‌ ‌soccer‌ ‌useful‌ ‌because‌ ‌I‌ ‌can‌ ‌improve‌ ‌my‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌attract‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌open‌ ‌their‌ ‌books‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

picture.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌prediction‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌can‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Who‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌they‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about?‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌then‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises‌.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌presents‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

follow‌ ‌along.‌ ‌After‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌listening,‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌recall‌ ‌in‌ ‌formation‌ ‌from‌ ‌

the‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Globe‌ ‌Citizen‌ ‌is……(‌ ‌the‌ ‌name‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌radio‌ ‌programme)‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Hai‌ ‌Ba‌ ‌Trung‌ ‌School‌ ‌/‌ ‌is…(the‌ ‌

school‌ ‌where‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌and‌ ‌Phuc‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌)‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Be‌ ‌a‌ ‌Buddy‌ ‌is…(‌ ‌the‌ ‌organisation‌ ‌

that‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌is‌ ‌from)‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Go‌ ‌green‌ ‌is….(the‌ ‌organisation‌ ‌that‌ ‌

Phuc‌ ‌is‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answer‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

partner‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

-Ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌make‌ ‌ ‌

I-‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

a.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌T‌ ‌

(true)‌ ‌or‌ ‌F‌ ‌(False).‌ ‌

1.T‌2.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌T‌4.‌ ‌F‌5.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌again.‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌a‌ ‌difference :‌ ‌not‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌It‌ ‌plants‌ ‌trees...‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌a‌ ‌non-profit‌ ‌organization‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Use‌ ‌Nouns,‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌and‌ ‌Adjectives‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

Draw‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌box.Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

to‌ ‌identify‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌exercise2‌ ‌

which‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌both‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌verbs,‌ ‌

or‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌and‌ ‌adjectives,‌ ‌ask‌ ‌students‌ ‌

if‌ ‌they‌ ‌can‌ ‌add‌ ‌more‌ ‌examples‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words‌ ‌they‌ ‌know.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box.‌ ‌Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌put‌ ‌

them‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌groups ?‌ ‌

Nouns‌ ‌

Verbs‌ ‌

Adjectives‌ ‌

help‌ ‌

benefit‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌

donate‌ ‌

help‌ ‌

benefit‌ ‌

clean‌ ‌

emvironmental‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

then‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌list‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌have‌ ‌already‌ ‌got‌ ‌from‌ ‌

exercise‌ ‌2‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌in‌ ‌

pairs‌ ‌or‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌draws‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌webs‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words‌ ‌webs‌ ‌in‌ ‌4-5‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌

sheet‌ ‌of‌ ‌paper‌ ‌at‌ ‌their‌ ‌tables.‌ ‌

plant‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌

recycle‌ ‌

plant‌ ‌

provide‌ ‌

clean‌ ‌

encourage‌ ‌


3.Fill‌ ‌the‌ ‌gaps‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌2.‌ ‌homeless‌ ‌people‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌donates‌ ‌4.‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌make‌ ‌a‌ ‌difference‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌donate‌ ‌2.‌ ‌plant‌ ‌3.‌ ‌help‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌clean‌ ‌5.‌ ‌recycle‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

5.‌ ‌Create‌ ‌word‌ ‌webs.‌ ‌ ‌

donate:‌ ‌books,‌ ‌blood,‌ ‌money,‌ ‌clothes,‌ ‌toys,‌ ‌

etc.‌ ‌

Help:‌ ‌children,‌ ‌street‌ ‌people,‌ ‌old‌ ‌people,‌ ‌the‌ ‌

poor,‌ ‌etc.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌about‌‌ ‌‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌about‌ ‌

c‌ommunity‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌

work‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌mistakes‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

I‌ ‌will‌ ‌donate‌ ‌my‌ ‌old‌ ‌books‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌poor‌ ‌

children‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌17:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Pronounce‌ ‌words‌ ‌containing‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌k‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌g/‌ ‌with‌ ‌increased‌ ‌fluency‌ ‌

and‌ ‌accyracy;‌ ‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation‌:‌ ‌‌/k/‌ ‌-‌ ‌/g/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌understand‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌brings‌ ‌a‌ ‌big‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌people‌ ‌in‌ ‌need‌ ‌

to‌ ‌class‌ ‌(children‌ ‌in‌ ‌mountainous‌ ‌areas‌ ‌

who‌ ‌do‌ ‌not‌ ‌have‌ ‌enough‌ ‌books).‌ ‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

discuss‌ ‌what‌ ‌difficulties‌ ‌they‌ ‌think‌ ‌people‌ ‌

in‌ ‌that‌ ‌situation‌ ‌face,‌ ‌and‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌need.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabularies‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌

work‌ ‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks:‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌the‌ ‌difficulties‌ ‌they‌ ‌face‌ ‌?‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

Ex1.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌that‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌disabled‌ ‌people:‌ ‌người‌ ‌tàn‌ ‌tật‌ ‌

+What‌ ‌do‌ ‌they‌ ‌need‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌matching‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌about‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌people‌ ‌in‌ ‌

each‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌situation‌ ‌in‌ ‌1‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌helped.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Divide‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌task.Once‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌have‌ ‌finished,‌ ‌elicit‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

a.Ask‌ ‌‘What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

photos?’‌ ‌‘‌ ‌Does‌ ‌our‌ ‌community‌ ‌

have‌ ‌similar‌ ‌problems?’‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌the‌ ‌

provided‌ ‌words‌ ‌include‌ ‌solutions‌ ‌

as‌ ‌well.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌

individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌task.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

b.‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌out‌ ‌

some‌ ‌solutions‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌problems‌ ‌in‌ ‌a.‌ ‌

Encourage‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌add‌ ‌their‌ ‌own‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌in‌ ‌

addition‌ ‌to‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌provided.‌ ‌

Once‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌have‌ ‌finished,‌ ‌elicit‌ ‌their‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌as‌ ‌

a‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌elderly‌ ‌people:‌ ‌người‌ ‌già‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌homeless‌ ‌people:‌ ‌người‌ ‌vô‌ ‌gia‌ ‌cư‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Sick‌ ‌children:‌ ‌trẻ‌ ‌em‌ ‌bị‌ ‌bệnh‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌people‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌flooded‌ ‌area:‌ ‌nạn‌ ‌nhân‌ ‌vùng‌ ‌

lũ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌‌ ‌‌a.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌photos.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a,b‌ ‌or‌ ‌

c‌ ‌next‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

 ‌

Rubbish‌ ‌

a‌ ‌

tracffic‌ ‌jams‌ ‌

c‌ ‌

too‌ ‌many‌ ‌advertisemnets‌ ‌

b‌ ‌

dirty‌ ‌beaches‌ ‌

a‌ ‌

no‌ ‌trees‌ ‌

a,‌ ‌c‌ ‌

Graffiti‌ ‌

b‌ ‌

 ‌

3b.‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌problems‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Pronounce‌ ‌words‌ ‌containing‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌k‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌g/‌‌ ‌with‌ ‌increased‌ ‌fluency‌ ‌and‌ ‌

accyracy‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌pause‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌to‌ ‌drill‌ ‌

difficult‌ ‌items.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌as‌ ‌many‌ ‌times‌ ‌

as‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌will‌ ‌hear‌ ‌one‌ ‌word‌ ‌

from‌ ‌each‌ ‌row.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Pronunciation‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌‌ ‌‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

/‌g/‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌k‌/‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Note‌:‌ ‌/b/‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌voiced‌ ‌sound,‌ ‌/p/‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌

voiceless‌ ‌sound.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌you‌ ‌

heard.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌


-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌instruct‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌hear.‌ ‌After‌ ‌

giving‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers,‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌practise‌ ‌both‌ ‌words‌ ‌(the‌ ‌

minimal‌ ‌pairs)‌ ‌from‌ ‌each‌ ‌row.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

repeat.‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌use‌ ‌back-chaining‌ ‌

technique‌ ‌if‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌find‌ ‌it‌ ‌difficult‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

cold‌green‌ ‌

clothes‌girl‌goal‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex6.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌listen‌ ‌words‌ ‌containing‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌k‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌g/‌‌ ‌with‌ ‌increased‌ ‌fluency‌ ‌and‌ ‌

accyracy‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌7:‌ ‌

-Ask‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌play‌ ‌game‌ ‌“‌ ‌stand‌ ‌up‌ ‌and‌ ‌

sit‌ ‌down”.‌ ‌Model‌ ‌this‌ ‌game‌ ‌with‌ ‌two‌ ‌

students‌ ‌first‌ ‌before‌ ‌dividing‌ ‌students‌ ‌in‌ ‌

to‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Modal‌ ‌this‌ ‌game‌ ‌with‌ ‌two‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌first‌ ‌

before‌ ‌dividing‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌For‌ ‌more‌ ‌advanced‌ ‌classes,‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌other‌ ‌minimal‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌as‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌table‌ ‌in‌ ‌5.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌their‌ ‌own‌ ‌

tables‌ ‌for‌ ‌further‌ ‌practice.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex7.‌ ‌Game‌ ‌:‌ ‌STAND‌ ‌UP,‌ ‌SIT‌ ‌DOWN!‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌18:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌difference‌ ‌between‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌

perfect;‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌time‌ ‌expressions‌ ‌that‌ ‌go‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌

perfect.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌form.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌divides‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌2‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌some‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌bare‌ ‌form:‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Group‌ ‌1‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

form.‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Group‌ ‌2‌ ‌writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌past‌ ‌

participle‌ ‌form.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌help-‌ ‌helped-‌ ‌helped‌ ‌

See-‌ ‌saw-‌ ‌seen‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌difference‌ ‌between‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌1:‌ ‌

underline‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌

simple.‌ ‌And‌ ‌then‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌present‌ ‌

simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌difference‌ ‌between‌ ‌present‌ ‌

perfect‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌Present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌vs‌ ‌Past‌ ‌

simple.‌ ‌

Ex1.a.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌again‌ ‌to‌ ‌part‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conversation.‌ ‌Underline‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

or‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1b.‌ ‌When‌ ‌do‌ ‌we‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple?‌ ‌

When‌ ‌do‌ ‌we‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect?‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌went‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi‌ ‌last‌ ‌year.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌English‌ ‌for‌ ‌2‌ ‌years.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌:‌ ‌S+‌ ‌Ved.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Present‌ ‌perfect:‌‌ ‌S+‌ ‌has/‌ ‌have‌ ‌+‌ ‌V.ed‌‌ ‌.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌NOTE‌:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Thì‌ ‌quá‌ ‌khứ‌ ‌đơn‌ ‌dùng‌ ‌để‌ ‌mô‌ ‌tả‌ ‌một‌ ‌

hành‌ ‌động‌ ‌bắt‌ ‌đầu‌ ‌và‌ ‌đã‌ ‌kết‌ ‌thúc‌ ‌trong‌ ‌

quá‌ ‌khứ.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Thì‌ ‌hiện‌ ‌tại‌ ‌hoàn‌ ‌thành‌ ‌diễn‌ ‌tả‌ ‌một‌ ‌hành‌ ‌

động‌ ‌mới‌ ‌diễn‌ ‌ra‌ ‌và‌ ‌còn‌ ‌để‌ ‌lại‌ ‌hậu‌ ‌quả‌ ‌

hoặc‌ ‌kết‌ ‌quả‌ ‌ở‌ ‌hiện‌ ‌tại‌ ‌;‌ ‌hoặc‌ ‌đã‌ ‌diễn‌ ‌ra‌ ‌

nhưng‌ ‌không‌ ‌đề‌ ‌cập‌ ‌thời‌ ‌gian.‌ ‌

*Remember!‌ ‌

-Một‌ ‌số‌ ‌trạng‌ ‌từ‌ ‌thường‌ ‌sử‌ ‌dụng‌ ‌với‌ ‌thì‌ ‌

QKĐ:‌ ‌‌yesterday,‌ ‌last‌ ‌month,‌ ‌2‌ ‌years‌ ‌

ago…‌ ‌

-Một‌ ‌số‌ ‌trạng‌ ‌từ‌ ‌thường‌ ‌sử‌ ‌dụng‌ ‌với‌ ‌thì‌ ‌

HTHT:‌ ‌‌ever,‌ ‌never,‌ ‌so‌ ‌far=‌ ‌recently=‌ ‌

lately,‌ ‌for‌ ‌several‌ ‌times,‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌long‌ ‌time,‌ ‌

for‌ ‌ages,‌ ‌for,‌ ‌since…‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.Then‌ ‌give‌ ‌feedback‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌whole‌ ‌

class‌ ‌activity.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Before‌ ‌giving‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers,‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

to‌ ‌tell‌ ‌him/her‌ ‌which‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌help‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌decide‌ ‌if‌ ‌the‌ ‌verb‌ ‌

should‌ ‌be‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌or‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌

simple.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌or‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌cleaned‌ ‌2.‌ ‌have‌ ‌collected‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌collected‌ ‌4.‌ ‌has‌ ‌flown;‌ ‌went‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Have‌ ‌you‌ ‌ever‌ ‌seen;‌ ‌saw‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌answer‌ ‌


-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌then‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌key.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌ ‌

Divided‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌two‌ ‌groups‌ ‌each‌ ‌

group‌ ‌write‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌about‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌

and‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌Each‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌is‌ ‌one‌ ‌

point.The‌ ‌group‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌points‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌

winner.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌b‌ ‌2.‌ ‌b‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌a‌4.‌ ‌a‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌c‌ ‌6.‌ ‌b‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

 ‌

(Students’‌ ‌answer)‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌‌ ‌‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌‘Be‌ ‌a‌ ‌Buddy’and‌ ‌‘Go‌ ‌green’‌ ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌Remind‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌of‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌learned‌ ‌in‌ ‌

Getting‌ ‌Started’‌ ‌about‌ ‌‘Be‌ ‌a‌ ‌Buddy’and‌ ‌

Go‌ ‌green’.Divide‌ ‌students‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌they‌ ‌

will‌ ‌need‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌

past‌ ‌simple.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Remind‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌this‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌activity‌ ‌

and‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌should‌ ‌communicate‌ ‌in‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌While‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌task,‌ ‌go‌ ‌round‌ ‌to‌ ‌monitor‌ ‌

to‌ ‌ensure‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌not‌ ‌just‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌

and‌ ‌say‌ ‌out‌ ‌the‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌for‌ ‌each‌ ‌other‌ ‌to‌ ‌

copy‌ ‌down.‌ ‌Take‌ ‌note‌ ‌of‌ ‌any‌ ‌common‌ ‌

errors‌ ‌and‌ ‌correct‌ ‌them‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class‌ ‌later.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌

the‌ ‌fact‌ ‌sheet‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌What‌ ‌happend‌ ‌in‌ ‌2011?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Be‌ ‌a‌ ‌Buddy‌ ‌was‌ ‌established‌ ‌in‌ ‌2011.‌ ‌

What‌ ‌did‌ ‌Be‌ ‌a‌ ‌Buddy‌ ‌do‌ ‌in‌ ‌2012?‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌In‌ ‌2012...‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌4‌ ‌page‌ ‌30‌ ‌(Workbook).‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Communication.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌19‌:‌ ‌‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌that‌ ‌

teenagers‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌USA‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌have‌ ‌done‌ ‌to‌ ‌help‌ ‌the‌ ‌community.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌‌ ‌‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌Students‌ ‌give‌ ‌different‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌activities.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Elicit‌ ‌different‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌activities‌ ‌from‌ ‌

Ss.‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌both‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌local‌ ‌community/city/town/Viet‌ ‌

Nam,‌ ‌and‌ ‌from‌ ‌other‌ ‌places‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌may‌ ‌

have‌ ‌read‌ ‌about,‌ ‌or‌ ‌seen‌ ‌in‌ ‌books,‌ ‌or‌ ‌on‌ ‌

TV,‌ ‌or‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet‌ ‌etc.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌Extra‌ ‌

Vocabulary‌ ‌box‌ ‌and‌ ‌try‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌what‌ ‌the‌ ‌

meanings‌ ‌are,‌ ‌how‌ ‌that‌ ‌may‌ ‌relate‌ ‌to‌ ‌

community‌ ‌services‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌

.And‌ ‌then‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains.‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Tutor‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌dạy‌ ‌kèm,‌ ‌gia‌ ‌sư‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Nursing‌ ‌home‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌nhà‌ ‌dưỡng‌ ‌lão‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Blanket‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌chăn‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Shelter‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌nhà‌ ‌tình‌ ‌thương‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Mural‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌tranh‌ ‌khổ‌ ‌lớn‌ ‌vẽ‌ ‌lên‌ ‌tường‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Graffiti‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌tường‌ ‌công‌ ‌cộng‌ ‌(có‌ ‌vẽ‌ ‌

tranh‌ ‌cổ‌ ‌động)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Sort‌ ‌(n),‌ ‌(v):‌ ‌loại‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Know‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌that‌ ‌teenagers‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌USA‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌have‌ ‌done‌ ‌to‌ ‌

help‌ ‌the‌ ‌community.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌photos‌ ‌and‌ ‌

describe‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌see.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌tell‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌

compate‌ ‌their‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌text.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌photos‌ ‌

about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌

and‌ ‌match‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌

activities.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌in‌ ‌

groups.‌ ‌Each‌ ‌group‌ ‌chooses‌ ‌one‌ ‌person‌ ‌

from‌ ‌the‌ ‌group‌ ‌to‌ ‌report‌ ‌back‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌in‌ ‌speaking.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Ex1:‌‌ ‌‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌photos‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌activites.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌photos‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

activities.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌b‌2.‌ ‌c‌3.‌ ‌e‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌a‌5.‌ ‌d‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌some‌ ‌activities‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

community‌ ‌service.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Give‌ ‌warm‌ ‌clothes‌ ‌to‌ ‌homeless‌ ‌people.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Donate‌ ‌some‌ ‌toys‌ ‌to‌ ‌street‌ ‌children.‌ ‌

………………..‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌‌ ‌‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌interview‌ ‌their‌ ‌partner‌ ‌about‌ ‌taking‌ ‌part‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌interview‌ ‌their‌ ‌partner‌ ‌

about‌ ‌taking‌ ‌part‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌community‌ ‌

service.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

Ex4‌:‌‌ ‌‌Choose‌ ‌three‌ ‌activities‌ ‌that‌ ‌you‌ ‌

want‌ ‌to‌ ‌try.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Have‌ ‌you‌ ‌ever‌ ‌done‌ ‌any‌ ‌of‌ ‌activities?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Yes‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌ever‌ ‌donated‌ ‌books‌ ‌to‌ ‌

chidren.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Why‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌that?‌ ‌


 ‌

B:‌ ‌Because‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌poor‌ ‌and‌ ‌they‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌

have‌ ‌money‌ ‌to‌ ‌buy‌ ‌some‌ ‌books.‌ ‌So‌ ‌I‌ ‌

should‌ ‌help‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌that‌ ‌teenagers‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌USA‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌nam‌ ‌have‌ ‌done‌ ‌to‌ ‌

help‌ ‌the‌ ‌community.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌20‌:‌ ‌‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Read‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work;‌ ‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌video‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌watch‌ ‌a‌ ‌video‌ ‌about‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌activities‌ ‌of‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌

and‌ ‌give‌ ‌feelings‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌watch‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌


Activity‌ ‌2‌.‌‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌makes‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌in‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Present‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌voluteer‌ ‌work ?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌kinds‌ ‌of‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌have‌ ‌you‌ ‌

done ?‌ ‌

Ex1.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌

in‌ ‌US.‌ ‌ ‌

*‌ ‌New‌ ‌words:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Statistics‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌thông‌ ‌tin‌ ‌được‌ ‌biểu‌ ‌hiện‌ ‌

bằng‌ ‌con‌ ‌số.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Population‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌dân‌ ‌số‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Force‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌bắt‌ ‌buộc‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Raise‌ ‌money‌ ‌for:quyên‌ ‌góp‌ ‌tiền‌ ‌cho.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Labour‌ ‌(n)công‌ ‌việc‌ ‌lao‌ ‌động‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Mentor(n)người‌ ‌hướng‌ ‌dẫn.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3‌.‌‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌United‌ ‌State‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌

underline‌ ‌any‌ ‌words‌ ‌they‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌know.‌ ‌

As‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class,‌ ‌T‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌any‌ ‌

unfamiliar‌ ‌words‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌

before‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌before‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌if‌ ‌the‌ ‌statements‌ ‌

are‌ ‌true‌ ‌or‌ ‌false.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

explain‌ ‌their‌ ‌choices‌ ‌(with‌ ‌support‌ ‌

from‌ ‌the‌ ‌text)‌ ‌before‌ ‌giving‌ ‌corrective‌ ‌

feedback.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌time‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌

individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌this‌ ‌task.‌ ‌

Encourage‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌activities‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌so‌ ‌

far‌ ‌in‌ ‌this‌ ‌unit,‌ ‌and‌ ‌any‌ ‌other‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

that‌ ‌they‌ ‌know.‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌they‌ ‌only‌ ‌need‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌are‌ ‌true‌ ‌or‌ ‌false.‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*Keys‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌F‌ ‌

(The‌ ‌text‌ ‌says‌ ‌Americans‌ ‌have‌ ‌had‌ ‌the‌ ‌

tradition‌ ‌of‌ ‌vounteering‌ ‌since‌ ‌the‌ ‌early‌ ‌days‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌country.‌ ‌The‌ ‌USA‌ ‌was‌ ‌“born”,‌ ‌or‌ ‌

declared‌ ‌its‌ ‌independence,‌ ‌in‌ ‌1776.)‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌F‌ ‌

(Americans‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌because‌ ‌they‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌it,‌ ‌

and‌ ‌not‌ ‌because‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌forced‌ ‌or‌ ‌paid‌ ‌to‌ ‌

do‌ ‌it).‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌Which‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌activities‌ ‌below‌ ‌are‌ ‌

traditional‌ ‌volunteeractivities‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌USA.‌ ‌

Tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌box:‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌providing‌ ‌care‌ ‌for‌ ‌animals‌ ‌

 ‌



to‌ ‌write‌ ‌in‌ ‌note‌ ‌form‌ ‌and‌ ‌not‌ ‌in‌ ‌full‌ ‌

sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌raising‌ ‌money‌ ‌

‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌meals‌ ‌

‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌donating‌ ‌blood‌ ‌

 ‌

5.‌ ‌cleaning‌ ‌streets‌ ‌

‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌young‌ ‌children‌ ‌

‌ ‌

 ‌

‌‌Activity‌ ‌4.‌‌ ‌‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-Give‌ ‌time‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌this‌ ‌task.‌ ‌Encourage‌ ‌them‌ ‌

to‌ ‌think‌ ‌of‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌so‌ ‌far‌ ‌in‌ ‌this‌ ‌unit,‌ ‌and‌ ‌

any‌ ‌other‌ ‌activities‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌

know.Tell‌ ‌ss‌ ‌they‌ ‌only‌ ‌need‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌

in‌ ‌note‌ ‌form‌ ‌and‌ ‌not‌ ‌in‌ ‌full‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Divide‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌groups‌ ‌of‌ ‌four.‌ ‌

Explain‌ ‌that‌ ‌after‌ ‌each‌ ‌person‌ ‌shares‌ ‌

his‌ ‌or‌ ‌her‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌from‌ ‌4,‌ ‌the‌ ‌group‌ ‌will‌ ‌

need‌ ‌to‌ ‌choose‌ ‌one‌ ‌idea‌ ‌and‌ ‌develop‌ ‌

it‌ ‌in‌ ‌more‌ ‌detail.‌ ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Speaking‌ ‌

Ex4:‌‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌with‌ ‌your‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌for‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌activities.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

A:We‌ ‌could‌ ‌cook‌ ‌and‌ ‌bring‌ ‌it‌ ‌to‌ ‌street‌ ‌

children.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌What‌ ‌can‌ ‌we‌ ‌cook?‌ ‌

C:‌ ‌We‌ ‌can‌ ‌bring‌ ‌fruits‌ ‌such‌ ‌as‌ ‌oranges,‌ ‌

apple…‌ ‌to‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

D:‌ ‌We‌ ‌can‌ ‌cook‌ ‌rice‌ ‌and‌ ‌meat‌ ‌to‌ ‌bring‌ ‌

them.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌21‌:‌ ‌‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌for‌ ‌specfic‌ ‌

information;‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Discuss‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌

activities.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Discussing‌ ‌:‌ ‌

Why‌ ‌do‌ ‌people‌ ‌do‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work?‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Pre-‌ ‌teaching:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌choose‌ ‌a‌ ‌volunteering‌ ‌idea‌ ‌

from‌ ‌the‌ ‌previous‌ ‌lessons.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌the‌ ‌class:‌ ‌‘Who‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌

benefits‌ ‌from‌ ‌that‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work?’‌ ‌‘In‌ ‌

what‌ ‌way?’‌ ‌

Then‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌class‌ ‌the‌ ‌two‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

in‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌elicits‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌While-‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌elicit‌ ‌from‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

the‌ ‌gist‌ ‌of‌ ‌this‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌(It’s‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

benefits‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌and‌ ‌Phuc‌ ‌think‌ ‌that‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌brings‌ ‌about.)‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌self‌ ‌–‌ ‌confident‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌tự‌ ‌tin‌ ‌

-‌ ‌special‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌đặc‌ ‌biệt‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌then‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌as‌ ‌many‌ ‌times‌ ‌as‌ ‌

necessary‌ ‌and‌ ‌have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Post‌ ‌–‌ ‌listening:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌audio‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

blanks.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Phuc‌ ‌does‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌because‌ ‌he‌ ‌

thinks‌ ‌it‌ ‌makes‌ ‌a‌ ‌difference‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

community.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Phuc‌ ‌feels‌ ‌more‌ ‌self-confident‌ ‌because‌ ‌

he‌ ‌has‌ ‌made‌ ‌many‌ ‌new‌ ‌friends.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌reporter‌ ‌thinks‌ ‌Phuc‌ ‌is‌ ‌confident‌ ‌

because‌ ‌Phuc‌ ‌has‌ ‌answered‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌very‌ ‌well.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌thinks‌ ‌volunteering‌ ‌is‌ ‌special‌ ‌

because‌ ‌she‌ ‌can‌ ‌help‌ ‌others,‌ ‌and‌ ‌because‌ ‌

she‌ ‌can‌ ‌see‌ ‌how‌ ‌happy‌ ‌the‌ ‌street‌ ‌children‌ ‌

are‌ ‌when‌ ‌they‌ ‌learn.‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blanks.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌feel‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌because‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌because,‌ ‌children‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌reasons.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌that‌ ‌‘because’‌ ‌is‌ ‌used‌ ‌to‌ ‌

introduce‌ ‌the‌ ‌reason‌ ‌for‌ ‌something,‌ ‌and‌ ‌it‌ ‌

can‌ ‌be‌ ‌put‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌beginning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentence‌ ‌or‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌middle.‌ ‌For‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌4,‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌need‌ ‌to‌ ‌identity‌ ‌which‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌is‌ ‌

the‌ ‌reason.‌ ‌

For‌ ‌a‌ ‌more‌ ‌advanced‌ ‌class,‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌

introduce‌ ‌‘as’‌ ‌and‌ ‌‘since’‌ ‌which‌ ‌are‌ ‌

similar‌ ‌in‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌to‌ ‌‘because’‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

Ex4.‌ ‌Combine‌ ‌the‌ ‌two‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌using‌ ‌

because.‌ ‌

 ‌(Answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌‘because’‌ ‌put‌ ‌in‌ ‌another‌ ‌

suitable‌ ‌place‌ ‌are‌ ‌also‌ ‌correct.)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌he‌ ‌didn’t‌ ‌wear‌ ‌enough‌ ‌warm‌ ‌

clothes,‌ ‌he’s‌ ‌had‌ ‌a‌ ‌cold‌ ‌for‌ ‌two‌ ‌days.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌stayed‌ ‌home‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌rained.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌the‌ ‌lake‌ ‌is‌ ‌full‌ ‌of‌ ‌rubbish,‌ ‌

they’ve‌ ‌decided‌ ‌to‌ ‌clean‌ ‌it‌ ‌up.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌she‌ ‌works‌ ‌in‌ ‌that‌ ‌small‌ ‌town,‌ ‌

she‌ ‌has‌ ‌lived‌ ‌there‌ ‌for‌ ‌three‌ ‌years.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌They‌ ‌think‌ ‌they‌ ‌should‌ ‌move‌ ‌there‌ ‌

because‌ ‌the‌ ‌neighbourhood‌ ‌is‌ ‌nice‌ ‌and‌ ‌

quiet.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌‌ ‌‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌now‌ ‌they‌ ‌will‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌

using‌ ‌the‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌they‌ ‌generated‌ ‌in‌ ‌

Speaking‌ ‌4.it‌ ‌time‌ ‌is‌ ‌short,‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌ ‌

Eg‌:‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌raise‌ ‌funds‌ ‌for‌ ‌street‌ ‌

children.‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌because‌ ‌we‌ ‌will‌ ‌


to‌ ‌make‌ ‌notes‌ ‌in‌ ‌class‌ ‌then‌ ‌develop‌ ‌the‌ ‌

notes‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌as‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌provide‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌

books.‌ ‌They‌ ‌will‌ ‌no‌ ‌longer‌ ‌be‌ ‌hungry.‌ ‌…..‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌and‌ ‌project‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌3:‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌SERVICE‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌22‌:‌ ‌‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌and‌ ‌projects‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌and‌ ‌

grammar‌ ‌items‌ ‌imperative.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Community‌ ‌service‌ ‌and‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌are‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌value‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌work‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌for‌ ‌community‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌something‌ ‌to‌ ‌others.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌song‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌an‌ ‌English‌ ‌song‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Song:‌ ‌Hello‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal‌:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌community‌ ‌service.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌reminds‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌wordwebs‌ ‌about‌ ‌

donate”,‌ ‌“provide”‌ ‌and‌ ‌“help”‌ ‌then‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌Activity‌ ‌1‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌Less‌ ‌

advanced‌ ‌classes.‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌some‌ ‌

words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌matched‌ ‌with‌ ‌

more‌ ‌than‌ ‌once‌ ‌verb‌ ‌in‌ ‌blue.‌ ‌

 ‌

I.Vocabulary‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌

*‌ ‌‌donate:‌ ‌food,‌ ‌books,‌ ‌clothing,‌ ‌blood‌ ‌

*‌ ‌provide:‌ ‌evening‌ ‌classes,‌ ‌food,‌ ‌care,‌ ‌

books,‌ ‌education,‌ ‌clothing,‌ ‌attention‌ ‌

*‌ ‌help:‌ ‌the‌ ‌community,‌ ‌homeless‌ ‌people,‌ ‌

the‌ ‌elderly,‌ ‌the‌ ‌disabled‌.‌ ‌

‌‌Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌explain‌ ‌why‌ ‌the‌ ‌option‌ ‌

they‌ ‌choose‌ ‌is‌ ‌suitable‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌but‌ ‌the‌ ‌other‌ ‌two‌ ‌options‌ ‌are‌ ‌

not.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌then‌ ‌

share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner‌ ‌and/or‌ ‌

the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌Before‌ ‌giving‌ ‌correction,‌ ‌T‌ ‌

may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌explain‌ ‌the‌ ‌differences‌ ‌

between‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌2‌ ‌and‌ ‌3,‌ ‌and‌ ‌4‌ ‌and‌ ‌5.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌can‌ ‌quickly‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌

present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌if‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

or‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌swap‌ ‌their‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Grammar.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌never‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Last‌ ‌week‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌already‌4.‌ ‌yet‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌yesterday‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌or‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌has‌ ‌ever‌ ‌met‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌visited‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌has‌ ‌visited‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌did‌ ‌Shakespeare‌ ‌write‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌has‌ ‌she‌ ‌written‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌senteces‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌the‌ ‌engine‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌good‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌be‌ ‌cold‌ ‌this‌ ‌evening‌ ‌

witings‌ ‌with‌ ‌each‌ ‌other‌ ‌for‌ ‌peer‌ ‌

correction.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌she’s‌ ‌kind.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌lucky‌ ‌as‌ ‌we‌ ‌are.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌she‌ ‌works‌ ‌very‌ ‌hard‌ ‌to‌ ‌improve‌ ‌her‌ ‌

teaching.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌can‌ ‌role‌ ‌–‌ ‌play‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌understand‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌

project‌ ‌about‌ ‌volunteer.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Divide‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌

their‌ ‌role‌ ‌cards‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌answer‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

with‌ ‌each‌ ‌other.‌ ‌It‌ ‌time‌ ‌permits,‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌

ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌role-‌ ‌play‌ ‌in‌ ‌group‌ ‌of‌ ‌three:‌ ‌

One‌ ‌student‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌reporter‌ ‌interviewing‌ ‌

the‌ ‌other‌ ‌two,‌ ‌the‌ ‌other‌ ‌two‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌work.(‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌refer‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Global‌ ‌Citizen‌ ‌interview)‌ ‌

Then‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌role‌ ‌play‌ ‌the‌ ‌interview‌ ‌for‌ ‌

the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌propose‌ ‌their‌ ‌own‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌project:‌ ‌

Give‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌several‌ ‌days‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

project,‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌present‌ ‌their‌ ‌

project‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌a‌ ‌poster.If‌ ‌the‌ ‌

project‌ ‌is‌ ‌useful‌ ‌and‌ ‌practical,‌ ‌T‌ ‌can‌ ‌

even‌ ‌help,‌ ‌or‌ ‌ask‌ ‌the‌ ‌school‌ ‌to‌ ‌help,‌ ‌to‌ ‌

realize‌ ‌the‌ ‌proposal!‌ ‌

 ‌

III.‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

IV.‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌23‌:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌1‌ ‌(UNITS‌ ‌1-‌ ‌2-‌ ‌3)‌ ‌

(‌ ‌Language,‌ ‌Vocabulary,‌ ‌Everyday‌ ‌English)‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌language‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌

include:‌ ‌pronunciation,‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌and‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌1-2-3‌ ‌by‌ ‌

doing‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌:‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌‌ ‌‌topic:‌‌ ‌‌hobbies,‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌community‌ ‌service.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌

perfect‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌more‌ ‌and‌ ‌less‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌the‌ ‌using‌ ‌of‌ ‌English‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌school,‌ ‌

hobbies,‌ ‌family‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌some‌ ‌activities‌ ‌to‌ ‌help‌ ‌

the‌ ‌community.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌revise‌ ‌pronunciation.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

I-‌ ‌Pronunciation‌ ‌

-‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌these‌ ‌words‌ ‌

first.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌mistakes.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌and‌ ‌

do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

-Then‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌out‌ ‌loud‌ ‌among‌ ‌

themselves.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌()‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌if‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌

same‌ ‌as‌ ‌what‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear‌ ‌and‌ ‌cross‌ ‌(‌ ‌X)‌ ‌if‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌

different.‌ ‌

1.lock‌ ‌x‌ ‌7.‌ ‌cream‌ ‌x‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌community‌ ‌✓‌ ‌8.‌ ‌grocer‌ ‌x‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌kind‌ ‌x‌ ‌9.‌ ‌vampire‌ ‌‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌cracker‌ ‌x‌ ‌10.‌ ‌bread‌ ‌‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌flavour‌ ‌✓‌ ‌11.‌ ‌fruit‌ ‌‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌fear‌ ‌✓‌ ‌12.‌ ‌vary‌ ‌x‌ ‌

Tapescript:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌log‌ ‌7.‌ ‌gleam‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌community‌ ‌8.‌ ‌closer‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌find‌ ‌9.‌ ‌vampire‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌fracture‌ ‌10.‌ ‌bread‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌flavour‌ ‌11.‌ ‌fruit‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌fear‌ ‌12.‌ ‌Carry‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌in‌ ‌which‌ ‌the‌ ‌

underlined‌ ‌sound‌ ‌is‌ ‌pronounced‌ ‌

differently.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌2.‌ ‌C‌ ‌3.‌ ‌C‌ ‌4.‌ ‌B‌ ‌5.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies,‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌community‌ ‌service‌ ‌;‌ ‌revise‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌use‌ ‌of‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌simple‌ ‌past‌ ‌and‌ ‌present‌ ‌perfect‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌down‌ ‌

the‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌in‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌columns.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌add‌ ‌more‌ ‌activities‌ ‌in‌ ‌

to‌ ‌the‌ ‌columns.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌helps‌ ‌by‌ ‌making‌ ‌suggestions‌ ‌or‌ ‌

giving‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌word.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌description.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌below‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

categories‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌activity/‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

you‌ ‌do‌ ‌yourself.‌ ‌

Activities‌ ‌to‌ ‌help…‌ ‌

yourself‌ ‌

Your‌ ‌community‌ ‌

-‌ ‌washing‌ ‌your‌ ‌

hands‌ ‌before‌ ‌meals‌ ‌

-‌ ‌tidying‌ ‌up‌ ‌your‌ ‌

room‌ ‌

-‌ ‌gardening‌ ‌

-‌ ‌eating‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌

fruit‌ ‌

-‌ ‌helping‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌

-‌ ‌raising‌ ‌money‌ ‌for‌ ‌

the‌ ‌poor‌ ‌

-‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌rubbish‌ ‌

in‌ ‌your‌ ‌area‌ ‌

-‌ ‌opening‌ ‌classes‌ ‌for‌ ‌

street‌ ‌children‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌can‌ ‌you‌ ‌remember?‌ ‌

Choose‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌below‌ ‌to‌ ‌

match‌ ‌the‌ ‌description.‌ ‌The‌ ‌first‌ ‌one‌ ‌is‌ ‌an‌ ‌

example.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌obeysity‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌cleaning‌ ‌the‌ ‌street‌ ‌


-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌and‌ ‌

explain.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌beginnings‌ ‌and‌ ‌

the‌ ‌endings‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌few‌ ‌minutes,‌ ‌then‌ ‌

match‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

read‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌their‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌if‌ ‌

necessary.‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌calories‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌staying‌ ‌in‌ ‌shape‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌donating‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌

 ‌

III.‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌answer‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B,‌ ‌or‌ ‌C‌ ‌to‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌2.‌ ‌C‌ ‌3.‌ ‌A‌ ‌4.‌ ‌B‌ ‌5.‌ ‌C‌ ‌6.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

6.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌beginnings‌ ‌in‌ ‌A‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

endings‌ ‌in‌ ‌B.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌d‌ ‌2.‌ ‌e‌ ‌3.‌ ‌a‌ ‌4.‌ ‌c‌ ‌5.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌practise‌ ‌English‌ ‌in‌ ‌real‌ ‌situation‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex7:‌ ‌

Suggested‌ ‌interpretation‌ ‌of‌ ‌your‌ ‌

answers:‌ ‌

If‌ ‌you‌ ‌answer‌ ‌“‌ ‌Yes”‌ ‌to‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions,‌ ‌you‌ ‌do‌ ‌have‌ ‌very‌ ‌healthy‌ ‌

eating‌ ‌habits.‌ ‌For‌ ‌each‌ ‌wrong‌ ‌answer,‌ ‌

take‌ ‌off‌ ‌1‌ ‌point.‌ ‌If‌ ‌your‌ ‌score‌ ‌is‌ ‌under‌ ‌

four,‌ ‌change‌ ‌your‌ ‌habits!‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

IV.‌ ‌Everyday‌ ‌English.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌Test‌ ‌yourself‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌1‌ ‌-‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌24‌:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌1‌ ‌(cont)‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌revise‌ ‌reading,‌ ‌

speaking,‌ ‌listening‌ ‌and‌ ‌writing‌ ‌about‌ ‌hobbies,‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌community‌ ‌service.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌:‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌‌ ‌‌topic:‌‌ ‌‌hobbies,‌ ‌health‌ ‌and‌ ‌community‌ ‌service.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌simple‌ ‌present,‌ ‌the‌ ‌future‌ ‌simple,‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌

perfect‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌liking‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Imperative‌ ‌with‌ ‌more‌ ‌and‌ ‌less‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Compound‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌love‌ ‌the‌ ‌using‌ ‌of‌ ‌English‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌song‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌an‌ ‌English‌ ‌song‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌and‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answer‌ ‌A,B,‌ ‌or‌ ‌C.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌first‌ ‌

and‌ ‌identify‌ ‌the‌ ‌keywords‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌

question.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌then‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌

choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

I-‌ ‌Reading.‌ ‌

LIVE‌ ‌TO‌ ‌BE‌ ‌HAPPY‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage,‌ ‌then‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌

most‌ ‌appropriate‌ ‌answer‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C‌ ‌to‌ ‌

each‌ ‌question.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌2.‌ ‌B‌ ‌3.‌ ‌C‌ ‌4.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌interview‌ ‌each‌ ‌other‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌and‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌

dialogue.‌ ‌

-Let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌start‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

question-and-answer‌ ‌through‌ ‌

speaking‌ ‌and‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌

they‌ ‌can‌ ‌exchange‌ ‌their‌ ‌results‌ ‌

and‌ ‌take‌ ‌turns‌ ‌to‌ ‌report‌ ‌it‌ ‌to‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listens‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌helps‌ ‌if‌ ‌necessary‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌the‌ ‌results‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

II-‌ ‌Speaking‌ ‌

ARE‌ ‌YOU‌ ‌A‌ ‌COMMUNITY‌ ‌

PERSON?‌ ‌

2.Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Interview‌ ‌each‌ ‌other‌ ‌

to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌questionaire‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

Circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌and‌ ‌report‌ ‌

the‌ ‌results‌ ‌to‌ ‌your‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌of‌ ‌hygienic‌ ‌problems‌ ‌

Yes‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

in‌ ‌your‌ ‌area?‌ ‌If‌ ‌yes,‌ ‌what‌ ‌is‌ ‌it?‌ ‌

No‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌How‌ ‌often‌ ‌does‌ ‌your‌ ‌community‌ ‌

Yes‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

organise‌ ‌an‌ ‌activity?‌ ‌Is‌ ‌it‌ ‌to‌ ‌help‌ ‌the‌ ‌

No‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

needy‌ ‌or‌ ‌to‌ ‌improve‌ ‌the‌ ‌environment?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Have‌ ‌you‌ ‌ever‌ ‌taken‌ ‌part‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌

Yes‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

community‌ ‌activity?‌ ‌If‌ ‌yes,‌ ‌what‌ ‌is‌ ‌it?‌ ‌

No‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌you‌ ‌

Yes‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

Would‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌a‌ ‌community‌ ‌activity?‌ ‌

No‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌like‌ ‌doing‌ ‌it‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌feel‌ ‌OK‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌it‌ ‌at‌ ‌all‌ ‌but‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌your‌ ‌Yes‌ ‌🖵‌ ‌

Contribution‌ ‌means‌ ‌to‌ ‌your‌ ‌No‌ ‌

🖵‌ ‌

Community?‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

III-‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌two‌ ‌friends‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌

different‌ ‌situations‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌to‌ ‌each‌ ‌question.‌ ‌

Conversation1:‌ ‌1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌2.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

Conversation2:‌ ‌1.‌ ‌B‌ ‌2.‌ ‌C‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌‌ ‌‌make‌ ‌complete‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌prompts‌ ‌and‌ ‌match‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures.‌ ‌


-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌determine‌ ‌the‌ ‌subjects‌ ‌

and‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌of‌ ‌each‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌to‌ ‌see‌ ‌if‌ ‌

it‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌simple‌ ‌or‌ ‌a‌ ‌compound‌ ‌sentence.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌may‌ ‌allow‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌translate‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌into‌ ‌Vietnamese.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌before‌ ‌

betting‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌second‌ ‌task‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

exercise.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

IV-‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌complete‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

prompts‌ ‌below‌ ‌and‌ ‌put‌ ‌them‌ ‌under‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌

Picture‌ ‌1:‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌This‌ ‌activity‌ ‌is‌ ‌often‌ ‌done‌ ‌in‌ ‌spring.‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌They‌ ‌dig‌ ‌a‌ ‌hole‌ ‌to‌ ‌put‌ ‌the‌ ‌young‌ ‌tree‌ ‌

in.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌They‌ ‌water‌ ‌and‌ ‌take‌ ‌great‌ ‌care‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

trees‌ ‌during‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌month.‌ ‌

Picture‌ ‌2:‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌They‌ ‌carry‌ ‌recycle‌ ‌bags‌ ‌to‌ ‌put‌ ‌the‌ ‌

rubbish‌ ‌in‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌They‌ ‌walk‌ ‌along‌ ‌the‌ ‌beach‌ ‌and‌ ‌

collect‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌rubbish.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌community‌ ‌organizes‌ ‌this‌ ‌

activity‌ ‌once‌ ‌a‌ ‌month.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌Test‌ ‌yourself‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌45‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌test.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌45-MINUTE‌ ‌TEST‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌OBJECTIVES‌ ‌:‌ ‌ ‌

By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌T‌ ‌is‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌check‌ ‌their‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌language‌ ‌knowledge,‌ ‌basic‌ ‌skills.‌ ‌

This‌ ‌will‌ ‌help‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌a‌ ‌suitable‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌approach.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowledge:‌ ‌

*Grammar:‌‌ ‌‌review‌ ‌

*Vocabulary:‌‌ ‌review‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Skills:‌ ‌‌Reading,‌ ‌writing,‌ ‌listening,‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌test‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌serious‌ ‌and‌ ‌strict‌ ‌manner‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌PREPARATION‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Teacher:‌ ‌‌Test‌ ‌paper,‌ ‌chalk…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Students:‌ ‌‌pen,…‌ ‌

III.THE‌ ‌CONTENTS‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Matrix‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Test‌ ‌ ‌

Chủ‌ ‌đề‌ ‌

Nhận‌ ‌biết‌ ‌

Thông‌ ‌hiểu‌ ‌

Vận‌ ‌dụng‌ ‌

Cộng‌ ‌

TNKQ‌ ‌

TL‌ ‌

TNK‌

Q‌ ‌

TL‌ ‌

TNK‌

Q‌ ‌

TL‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Listening‌ ‌

 ‌

Listen‌ ‌&‌ ‌

tick‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

True/False‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌8‌ ‌

 ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌4‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

1đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌10%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌4‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌1đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌10%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌8‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌2đ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Use‌ ‌of‌ ‌

language‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Multi-choi‌

ce‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Tenses‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌11‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

3,5‌ ‌đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌35%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌08‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:3‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm‌ ‌

:1,5đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌15%‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌11‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

3,5‌ ‌đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌35%‌ ‌

Reading‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

The‌ ‌

volunteer‌ ‌

work‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌06‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌06‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌06‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌2đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌2đ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Writing‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 Rewrite‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Word‌ ‌

form‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌05‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌02‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌1đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌10%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌

03‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌05‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2,5đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

1,5đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2,5đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌25%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌15%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌25%‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌

câu:‌ ‌30‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌12‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌12‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌6‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:30‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌

điểm:‌ ‌10đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌3đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌4đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌3đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

10đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌100%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌30%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌40‌ ‌%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌30%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌100%‌ ‌

2.The‌ ‌Test‌ ‌(45’)‌ ‌ ‌

A.LISTENING:‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌I.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌()‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌if‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear‌ ‌

and‌ ‌cross‌ ‌(x)‌ ‌it‌ ‌if‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌different‌ ‌(1‌ ‌point).‌ ‌

1.lock‌ ‌

□‌ ‌

2.community‌ ‌

□‌ ‌

3.kind‌ ‌

□‌ ‌

4.cracker‌ ‌

□‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌II.‌ ‌Are‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌True‌ ‌(T)‌ ‌or‌ ‌False‌ ‌(F)‌ ‌(1‌ ‌point)‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌

F‌ ‌

1.He‌ ‌wanted‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌sports‌ ‌because‌ ‌of‌ ‌his‌ ‌friends.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.Taking‌ ‌up‌ ‌sports‌ ‌was‌ ‌easy.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

3.In‌ ‌this‌ ‌event,‌ ‌you‌ ‌swim,‌ ‌run,‌ ‌and‌ ‌climb.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

4.This‌ ‌event‌ ‌uses‌ ‌more‌ ‌than‌ ‌6000‌ ‌calories.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

B.‌ ‌USE‌ ‌OF‌ ‌LANGUAGE‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌III.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌(‌ ‌2‌ ‌points‌ ‌)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌She‌ ‌looks‌ ‌very‌ ‌red‌ ‌because‌ ‌she‌ ‌was‌ ‌outdoors‌ ‌all‌ ‌day‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌She‌ ‌has‌ ‌……‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌allergy‌ ‌B.‌ ‌sunburn‌ ‌C.‌ ‌headache‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌Americans‌ ‌eat‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot,‌ ‌…….‌ ‌they‌ ‌do‌ ‌not‌ ‌do‌ ‌enough‌ ‌exercise.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌or‌ ‌ ‌B.‌ ‌so‌ ‌C.‌ ‌but‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌They‌ ‌usually‌ ‌…….‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌beautiful‌ ‌photos‌ ‌during‌ ‌their‌ ‌picnic.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌take‌ ‌B.‌ ‌go‌ ‌C.‌ ‌play‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌What’s‌ ‌your‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌…….‌ ‌,‌ ‌Linda‌ ‌?‌ ‌-‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌climbing.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌country‌ ‌B.‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌C.‌ ‌food‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌My‌ ‌sister‌ ‌loves…………..boarding‌ ‌games‌ ‌with‌ ‌me‌ ‌every‌ ‌evening.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌playing‌ ‌B.‌ ‌plays‌C.‌ ‌play‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Last‌ ‌year,‌ ‌we‌ ‌…………‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌warm‌ ‌clothes‌ ‌for‌ ‌street‌ ‌children.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌donate‌ ‌B.‌ ‌has‌ ‌donated‌C.‌ ‌donated‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌…………less‌ ‌time‌ ‌playing‌ ‌computer‌ ‌games.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌Spend‌ ‌B.‌ ‌Spending‌C.‌ ‌To‌ ‌spend‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌I‌ ‌………….‌ ‌your‌ ‌mother‌ ‌before.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌has‌ ‌met‌ ‌B.‌ ‌have‌ ‌met‌ ‌C.‌ ‌met‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌IV:‌ ‌Give‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌verbs:‌ ‌(‌ ‌1.5‌ ‌points)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌and‌ ‌my‌ ‌boyfriend‌ ‌(visit)‌ ‌………………‌ ‌London‌ ‌several‌ ‌times.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌They‌ ‌(fly‌ ‌)‌ ‌…………………….‌ ‌to‌ ‌Dalat‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌flower‌ ‌festival‌ ‌2‌ ‌year‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌She‌ ‌(not‌ ‌continue)‌ ‌…………………..‌ ‌her‌ ‌hobby‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌future.‌ ‌

C.READING‌ ‌

The‌ ‌first‌ ‌reason‌ ‌why‌ ‌many‌ ‌families‌ ‌do‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌is‌ ‌that‌ ‌they‌ ‌feel‌ ‌satisfied‌ ‌and‌ ‌

proud.‌ ‌The‌ ‌feeling‌ ‌of‌ ‌fulfillment‌ ‌comes‌ ‌from‌ ‌helping‌ ‌the‌ ‌community‌ ‌and‌ ‌other‌ ‌people.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌addition,‌ ‌volunteering‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌great‌ ‌way‌ ‌for‌ ‌families‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌fun‌ ‌and‌ ‌feel‌ ‌closer.‌ ‌But‌ ‌

many‌ ‌people‌ ‌say‌ ‌they‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌have‌ ‌time‌ ‌to‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌because‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌and‌ ‌take‌ ‌

care‌ ‌of‌ ‌their‌ ‌families.‌ ‌If‌ ‌that’s‌ ‌the‌ ‌case,‌ ‌try‌ ‌rethinking‌ ‌some‌ ‌of‌ ‌your‌ ‌free‌ ‌time‌ ‌as‌ ‌a‌ ‌

family.‌ ‌You‌ ‌could‌ ‌select‌ ‌just‌ ‌one‌ ‌or‌ ‌two‌ ‌projects‌ ‌a‌ ‌year‌ ‌and‌ ‌make‌ ‌them‌ ‌a‌ ‌family‌ ‌

tradition.‌ ‌For‌ ‌instance,‌ ‌your‌ ‌family‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌and‌ ‌donate‌ ‌gift‌ ‌baskets‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌

homeless‌ ‌people‌ ‌on‌ ‌holidays.‌ ‌Your‌ ‌family‌ ‌can‌ ‌also‌ ‌spend‌ ‌only‌ ‌one‌ ‌Saturday‌ ‌morning‌ ‌a‌ ‌

month‌ ‌collecting‌ ‌rubbish‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌neighborhood.‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌V:‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌True‌ ‌(T)‌ ‌or‌ ‌false‌ ‌(F).(‌ ‌1‌ ‌point)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Many‌ ‌families‌ ‌do‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌because‌ ‌they‌ ‌feel‌ ‌satisfied‌ ‌and‌ ‌proud.‌______‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Volunteer‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌bad‌ ‌way‌ ‌for‌ ‌families‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌fun‌ ‌and‌ ‌feel‌ ‌closer.‌______‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌family‌ ‌can‌ ‌donate‌ ‌bloods‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌homeless‌ ‌people.‌______‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌They‌ ‌also‌ ‌collect‌ ‌rubbish‌ ‌one‌ ‌Saturday‌ ‌morning‌ ‌a‌ ‌month‌______‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌VI.‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌(1‌ ‌point)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌How‌ ‌can‌ ‌the‌ ‌family‌ ‌help‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌homeless‌ ‌people?‌ ‌

🡪…………………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Why‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌many‌ ‌people‌ ‌have‌ ‌time‌ ‌to‌ ‌volunteer?‌ ‌

🡪…………………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

D.WRITING‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌VII:‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌using‌ ‌conjunction‌ ‌given.‌ ‌(1‌ ‌point)‌ ‌

1.The‌ ‌Japanese‌ ‌eat‌ ‌healthily.‌ ‌They‌ ‌live‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌long‌ ‌time.‌ ‌‌(so)‌ ‌

🡪…………………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

2.My‌ ‌sister‌ ‌plays‌ ‌computer‌ ‌game.‌ ‌She‌ ‌does‌ ‌morning‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌too.‌ ‌‌(but)‌ ‌ ‌

🡪…………………………………………………………………………………‌ ‌

Question‌ ‌VIII:‌ ‌Reorder‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaningful‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌ ‌

(1.5‌ ‌points)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌love‌ ‌_____________‌ ‌pottery‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌challenge.‌ ‌(MAKE)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Many‌ ‌people‌ ‌do‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌work‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌makes‌ ‌a‌ ‌____________‌ ‌(DIFFER)‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌_____________‌ ‌to‌ ‌eat‌ ‌o‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌junk‌ ‌food.‌ ‌(HEALTH‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

Asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌26:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started:‌ ‌Making‌ ‌plans‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌weekend‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌ ‌

to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌title‌ ‌/‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌

and‌ ‌guess‌ ‌what‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌between‌ ‌

Duong‌ ‌and‌ ‌Nick‌ ‌might‌ ‌be‌ ‌about.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Questions‌ ‌

-Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌often‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌music?‌ ‌

When?‌ ‌How‌ ‌often?‌ ‌

-What‌ ‌kind‌ ‌of‌ ‌music‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌?‌ ‌

Why‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-What‌ ‌is‌ ‌art/‌ ‌are‌ ‌arts‌ ‌?Give‌ ‌

example?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌listen,‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌some‌ ‌expressions‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌Teacher‌ ‌sets‌ ‌the‌ ‌scene‌ ‌by‌ ‌asking‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌ ‌

Where‌ ‌are‌ ‌Nick‌ ‌,‌ ‌Khang‌ ‌and‌ ‌Phong?‌ ‌ ‌

What‌ ‌might‌ ‌be‌ ‌happening‌ ‌to‌ ‌them?‌ ‌What‌ ‌

are‌ ‌they‌ ‌doing?‌ ‌

-Have‌ ‌you‌ ‌ever‌ ‌got‌ ‌lost?‌ ‌Where‌ ‌and‌ ‌

when?‌ ‌

How‌ ‌did‌ ‌you‌ ‌feel‌ ‌then?‌ ‌What‌ ‌did‌ ‌you‌ ‌

do?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Elicits‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌using‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌

and‌ ‌explaination‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Check‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌ ‌:‌ ‌R‌ ‌O‌ ‌R‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌independently‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌independently‌ ‌

Vocabulary:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌ex'cited‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌ex'citing‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌historic‌ ‌[his'tɔrik](a)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌lost‌ ‌(a)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌memorial‌ ‌[mə'mɔ:riəl]‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌cathedral‌ ‌[kə'θi:drəl](n)‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

a.‌ ‌Are‌ ‌these‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌true‌ ‌(T)‌ ‌or‌ ‌false‌ ‌

(F)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌T,‌ ‌2.‌ ‌F,‌ ‌3.‌ ‌T,‌ ‌4.‌ ‌F,‌ ‌5.‌ ‌F‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌let‌ ‌them‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌T‌ ‌then‌ ‌

checks‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers,‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌

explanation.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌fill‌ ‌the‌ ‌

gaps‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌them‌ ‌check‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌or‌ ‌

groups.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌key.‌ ‌Calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌some‌ ‌expressions‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conversation‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌practise‌ ‌saying‌ ‌them‌ ‌together.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌practise‌ ‌the‌ ‌short‌ ‌

conversations‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌before‌ ‌creating‌ ‌

their‌ ‌short‌ ‌role-plays.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

b.‌ ‌Finish‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌by‌ ‌

writing‌ ‌one‌ ‌word/‌ ‌phrase‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

conversation.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Keys‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌as‌ ‌good‌ ‌as‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌loud‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌fantastic‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌in‌ ‌person‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌cinema‌ ‌

c.‌‌ ‌‌Colloquial‌ ‌expressions‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Let‌ ‌me‌ ‌see:‌ ‌used‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌your‌ ‌interest‌ ‌

or‌ ‌surprise.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Come‌ ‌on:‌ ‌used‌ ‌when‌ ‌you‌ ‌are‌ ‌thinking‌ ‌

what‌ ‌to‌ ‌say‌ ‌or‌ ‌reply.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Come‌ ‌on:‌ ‌used‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌that‌ ‌you‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌

agree‌ ‌with‌ ‌what‌ ‌Sbd‌ ‌has‌ ‌said.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌It‌ ‌isn’t‌ ‌my‌ ‌thing:‌ ‌used‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌that‌ ‌

you‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌something.‌ ‌

d.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌short‌ ‌role-plays‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

expressions‌ ‌above.‌ ‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌A:‌ ‌There’ll‌ ‌be‌ ‌a‌ ‌music‌ ‌concert‌ ‌

on‌ ‌teacher’‌ ‌Day.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Really?‌ ‌Are‌ ‌we‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌sing?‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌of‌ ‌course.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌more‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic:‌ ‌

Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts”‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌

under‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌Let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌

repeat.‌ ‌Check‌ ‌and‌ ‌correct‌ ‌their‌ ‌

pronunciation.‌ ‌Give‌ ‌them‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌word/‌ ‌phrase‌ ‌

under‌ ‌each‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌listen‌ ‌

and‌ ‌repeat‌.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌microphone‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌camera‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌painting‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌musical‌ ‌instrument‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌portrait‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌art‌ ‌gallery‌ ‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌crayons‌ ‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌museum‌ ‌

9.‌ ‌opera‌ ‌ ‌

10.‌ ‌painbrush‌ ‌


 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌spaces.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌allows‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌check‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌The‌ ‌

class‌ ‌gives‌ ‌comments.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌correction.‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌these‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌

words‌ ‌from‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌art‌ ‌gallery‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌paintings‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌museum‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌camera‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌opera‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌about‌ ‌benefits‌ ‌of‌ ‌learning‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌in‌ ‌school.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌benefits‌ ‌of‌ ‌learning‌ ‌

music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌in‌ ‌school.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌music‌ ‌is‌ ‌important‌ ‌to‌ ‌

you?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌of‌ ‌course.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌important‌ ‌

to‌ ‌me‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌helps‌ ‌me‌ ‌relax‌ ‌and‌ ‌

reduce‌ ‌the‌ ‌stress.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌27:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Use‌ ‌the‌ ‌lexical‌ ‌items‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Pronounce‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌‌/‌ ‌ʃ‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌/‌ ‌ʒ‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌correctly‌ ‌in‌ ‌isolation‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌context.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌ʃ‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌ʒ‌ ‌/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌song‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌arts‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌

music.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song:‌ ‌“I‌ ‌am‌ ‌the‌ ‌music‌ ‌man”‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌

and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌teaches‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌by‌ ‌giving‌ ‌some‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌copy‌ ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌it‌ ‌again‌ ‌with‌ ‌pauses‌ ‌for‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌

repeat‌ ‌each‌ ‌word.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌their‌ ‌pronunciation.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌‌ ‌‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

with‌ ‌the‌ ‌phrases.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌one‌ ‌or‌ ‌two‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

combinations‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌by‌ ‌doing‌ ‌

exercise‌ ‌3‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

painter‌ ‌artist‌ ‌actress‌ ‌musician‌ ‌

puppet‌ ‌dancer‌ ‌singer‌ ‌song‌ ‌writer‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌a‌ ‌word‌ ‌in‌ ‌A‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌phrase‌ ‌

in‌ ‌B‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌e‌ ‌2.‌ ‌b‌ ‌3.‌ ‌a‌ ‌4.‌ ‌d‌ ‌5.‌ ‌c‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Arrange‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

type‌ ‌of‌ ‌musical‌ ‌instrument‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌

under‌ ‌each‌ ‌picture‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌a‌ ‌guitar‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌a‌ ‌drum‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌one‌ ‌string‌ ‌guitar‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌a‌ ‌violin‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌enough‌ ‌time‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌may‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌a‌ ‌cello‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌a‌ ‌piano‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌a‌ ‌saxophone‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌these‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌

blank‌ ‌to‌ ‌finish‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌painter‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Pop‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌singer‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌draw‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌puppets‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌instrument‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌correctly‌ ‌in‌ ‌isolation‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌context.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌practice‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌shows‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌the‌ ‌two‌ ‌

sounds.‌ ‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌

and‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌their‌ ‌pronunciation.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌2‌ ‌or‌ ‌3‌ ‌times.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌helps‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌distinguish‌ ‌the‌ ‌two‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌ ‌

/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/,‌ ‌and‌ ‌put‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌

columns.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌more‌ ‌words‌ ‌having‌ ‌two‌ ‌

sounds.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌as‌ ‌many‌ ‌times‌ ‌as‌ ‌

possible‌ ‌and‌ ‌let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌repead‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌their‌ ‌pronunciation‌ ‌and‌ ‌help‌ ‌

them‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌as‌ ‌directed.‌ ‌

*Sound‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌presented‌ ‌by‌ ‌sh/‌ ‌ch/‌ ‌

s/‌ ‌t/‌ ‌c‌ ‌

*Sound‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌represented‌ ‌by‌ ‌s‌ ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌ ‌‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌Pay‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/.‌ ‌

Tapescript:‌ ‌ ‌

/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/:‌ ‌condition,‌ ‌ocean,‌ ‌shy‌ ‌,‌ ‌sugar,‌ ‌

machine‌ ‌

/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/:‌ ‌measure,‌ ‌pleasure,‌ ‌usual,‌ ‌vision,‌ ‌

decision‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌put‌ ‌them‌ ‌into‌ ‌

two‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

anxious‌ ‌

musician‌ ‌

dishwasher‌ ‌

rubbish‌ ‌

closure‌ ‌

occasion‌ ‌

leisure‌ ‌

version‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat…‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌‌show‌‌ ‌me‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌‌machine‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌They‌ ‌sing‌ ‌the‌ ‌song‌ ‌“‌ ‌Auld‌ ‌Lang‌ ‌Syne”‌ ‌ ‌

on‌ ‌some‌ ‌‌occasions‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌‌musician‌‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌‌anxious‌‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌ ‌

next‌ ‌performance.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌She‌ ‌wanted‌ ‌to‌ ‌‌share‌‌ ‌her‌ ‌‌pleasure‌‌ ‌‌with‌ ‌

other‌ ‌people.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌new‌ ‌cinema‌ ‌is‌ ‌opposite‌ ‌the‌ ‌bus‌ ‌

station.‌ ‌



6.‌ ‌Are‌ ‌you‌ ‌‌sure‌‌ ‌this‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌modern‌ ‌‌version‌ ‌

of‌ ‌“Romeo‌ ‌and‌ ‌Juliet?”‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌correctly‌ ‌by‌ ‌playing‌ ‌game‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Divide‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌into‌ ‌2‌ ‌lines‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Write‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board:‌ ‌Right‌ ‌is‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌

left‌ ‌is‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Turn‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌step‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌right‌ ‌if‌ ‌they‌ ‌hear‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sound‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌,‌ ‌and‌ ‌step‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌left‌ ‌if‌ ‌

they‌ ‌hear‌ ‌the‌ ‌sound‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌feedback‌ ‌

Practise‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌ʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌ʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌28:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives.‌ ‌

By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Use‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as…..as‌ ‌/‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌/‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Express‌ ‌agreement‌ ‌using‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Express‌ ‌agreement:‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌art.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Questions‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌often‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌music‌ ‌?When?‌ ‌

How‌ ‌often?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌kind‌ ‌of‌ ‌music‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌?Why?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌art/are‌ ‌arts?‌ ‌Give‌ ‌example?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as…..as‌ ‌/‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌/‌ ‌different‌ ‌

from‌ ‌and‌ ‌too,‌ ‌either‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌three‌ ‌structures‌ ‌

to‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌

examples.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌copy‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌exmaples‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌the‌ ‌use‌ ‌and‌ ‌

location‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌of‌ ‌too‌ ‌and‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌copy‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌exmaples‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Comparisons‌ ‌

(not)‌ ‌as……..as‌ ‌/‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌/‌ ‌different‌ ‌

from‌ ‌

-‌ ‌as‌ ‌+‌ ‌adjective‌ ‌+‌ ‌as‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌that‌ ‌two‌ ‌

things‌ ‌are‌ ‌similar.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌+‌ ‌adjective‌ ‌+‌ ‌as‌ ‌to‌ ‌mean‌ ‌

something‌ ‌is‌ ‌more‌ ‌or‌ ‌less‌ ‌than‌ ‌something‌ ‌

else.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as…‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌similarity.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌that‌ ‌two‌ ‌or‌ ‌more‌ ‌

things‌ ‌are‌ ‌different.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌(‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌book.)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either‌ ‌

-‌ ‌too:‌ ‌used‌ ‌to‌ ‌express‌ ‌agreement‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

positive‌ ‌statement.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌either:‌ ‌used‌ ‌to‌ ‌express‌ ‌agreement‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

negative‌ ‌statement.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌and‌ ‌use‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as…..as‌ ‌/‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌/‌ ‌different‌ ‌

from‌ ‌and‌ ‌too‌ ‌and‌ ‌either‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌by‌ ‌themselves‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌down‌ ‌

the‌ ‌missing‌ ‌words.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌mistakes.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌put‌ ‌a‌ ‌suitable‌ ‌word‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌gap,‌ ‌and‌ ‌

compare‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌classmate.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌if‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌their‌ ‌pronunciation.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌helps‌ ‌them‌ ‌interpret‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌first.‌ ‌–‌ ‌T‌ ‌

gives‌ ‌them‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌

task.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌independently,‌ ‌writing‌ ‌down‌ ‌the‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌let‌ ‌them‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌to‌ ‌

check‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌out‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌goes‌ ‌round‌ ‌and‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌mistakes‌ ‌or‌ ‌

gives‌ ‌help‌ ‌when‌ ‌and‌ ‌where‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌lists‌ ‌of‌ ‌

ideas.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌more‌ ‌able‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌report‌ ‌

their‌ ‌results‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌as,‌ ‌than,‌ ‌or‌ ‌from‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌gaps.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌as‌ ‌2.‌ ‌as‌ ‌3.‌ ‌as‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌from‌ ‌5.‌ ‌as‌ ‌6.‌ ‌as‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌a‌ ‌suitable‌ ‌word‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌gap‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌passage.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌as‌ ‌quiet‌ ‌as‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌as‌ ‌narrow‌ ‌as‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌friendly‌ ‌as‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌Young‌ ‌talent‌ ‌is‌ ‌more‌ ‌friendly‌ ‌than‌ ‌

Nightingale.‌ ‌

Nightingale‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌friendly‌ ‌as‌ ‌Young‌ ‌

Talent,‌ ‌but‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌safer.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

with‌ ‌“too”‌ ‌or‌ ‌“either”‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌too‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌either‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌either‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌too‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌too‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Report‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌using‌ ‌too/‌ ‌

either.‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌ ‌

Nam‌ ‌is‌ ‌interested‌ ‌in‌ ‌drawing‌ ‌and‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌

too.‌ ‌

Phong‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌folk‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌

either.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice.‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌you‌ ‌are‌ ‌interested,‌ ‌or‌ ‌not‌ ‌interested‌ ‌in‌ ‌using‌ ‌

some‌ ‌suggestions‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

given‌ ‌or‌ ‌your‌ ‌own‌ ‌ideas.‌ ‌


 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

Let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌independently,writing‌ ‌down‌ ‌

their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌a‌ ‌list‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌likes‌ ‌

and‌ ‌dislikes.They‌ ‌have‌ ‌their‌ ‌choices,‌ ‌so‌ ‌

long‌ ‌as‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌are‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

grammatically.‌ ‌Encourage‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌

their‌ ‌own‌ ‌ideas.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Suggestion:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I’m‌ ‌very‌ ‌interested‌ ‌in‌ ‌‌Pop‌ ‌music‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌‌music‌‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌boring‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌I‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌most‌ ‌in‌ ‌my‌ ‌spare‌ ‌time‌ ‌

is‌ ‌………….‌ ‌

-‌ ‌In‌ ‌my‌ ‌spare‌ ‌time,‌ ‌I‌ ‌often‌ ‌…………..‌ ‌

-‌ ‌I‌ ‌never‌ ‌…………,‌ ‌even‌ ‌if‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌time‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌29:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌ ‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌opinion‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌arts‌ ‌should‌ ‌be‌ ‌compulsory‌ ‌

subjects‌ ‌at‌ ‌schools‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Talk/‌ ‌sing‌ ‌or‌ ‌do‌ ‌other‌ ‌activities‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Express‌ ‌agreement:‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌‌ ‌‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal‌:‌ ‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌“music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts”.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌teaches‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌copy‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Extra‌ ‌vocabulary.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Composer‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Originate‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Anthem‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Curriculum‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Compulsory‌ ‌(adj)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Academic‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌‌ ‌‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌read‌ ‌and‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌contents‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌about‌ ‌

learning‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌subjects‌ ‌at‌ ‌school‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌and‌ ‌

find‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌ideas.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌content.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

important‌ ‌of‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌in‌ ‌

education?‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌question‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌models‌ ‌with‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌some‌ ‌

suggestions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌and‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌question:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌arts‌ ‌should‌ ‌be‌ ‌

compulsory‌ ‌subjects‌ ‌at‌ ‌schools‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌

Nam?‌ ‌Why‌ ‌or‌ ‌Why‌ ‌not?‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

T:‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌should‌ ‌be‌ ‌

compulsory‌ ‌subjects‌ ‌at‌ ‌schools‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌

Nam?‌ ‌ ‌

S:‌ ‌I‌ ‌agree‌ ‌because‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌helps‌ ‌

students‌ ‌relax‌ ‌their‌ ‌mind.‌ ‌What‌ ‌about‌ ‌you?‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌benifits‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌top‌ ‌three‌ ‌subjects‌ ‌on‌ ‌their‌ ‌list‌ ‌help‌ ‌

them‌ ‌in‌ ‌other‌ ‌areas‌ ‌of‌ ‌shool‌ ‌and‌ ‌life.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌example.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌prepare‌ ‌in‌ ‌one‌ ‌minutes.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌prepare‌ ‌in‌ ‌one‌ ‌minutes.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌then‌ ‌gives‌ ‌comments.‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌a‌ ‌list‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌useful‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

least‌ ‌useful.‌ ‌How‌ ‌can‌ ‌the‌ ‌top‌ ‌three‌ ‌

subjects‌ ‌on‌ ‌your‌ ‌list‌ ‌help‌ ‌you‌ ‌in‌ ‌other‌ ‌

areas‌ ‌of‌ ‌school‌ ‌and‌ ‌life?‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Music‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Dancing‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Singing‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Painting‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Photography.‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

I‌ ‌like‌ ‌music‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌helps‌ ‌me‌ ‌relax‌ ‌after‌ ‌

a‌ ‌hard-working‌ ‌day.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌more‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌6‌ ‌questions‌ ‌in‌ ‌

textbook‌ ‌and‌ ‌other‌ ‌questions‌ ‌by‌ ‌

playing‌ ‌games.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌guiges‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌play.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌play‌ ‌a‌ ‌game‌ ‌

T‌ ‌comments‌ ‌the‌ ‌game.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*Question:‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*Keys‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌B‌ ‌2.‌ ‌C‌ ‌3.‌ ‌A‌ ‌4.‌ ‌C‌ ‌5.‌ ‌B‌ ‌6.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

‌‌*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌short‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌benefits‌ ‌of‌ ‌learning‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌in‌ ‌

school.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise:‌ ‌C1,‌ ‌2‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌workbook‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌4‌ ‌-‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

_______________________________________________________‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌30:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives‌:‌ ‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌for‌ ‌specific‌ ‌information‌ ‌

about‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Express‌ ‌agreement:‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌and‌ ‌be‌ ‌proud‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌tradidional‌ ‌art‌ ‌forms‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌‌ ‌‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌performance.‌ ‌

Discussion:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌kinds‌ ‌of‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌

performance‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌about?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌about‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry?‌ ‌

Have‌ ‌you‌ ‌been‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppet‌ ‌show?‌ ‌If‌ ‌

yes,‌ ‌did‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌it?‌ ‌Why‌ ‌or‌ ‌why‌ ‌not?‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌‌ ‌‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌guess‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

vocabulary.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌this‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌will‌ ‌appear‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌that‌ ‌follows.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌by‌ ‌definition‌ ‌them‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen,‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌and‌ ‌copy‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌find‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words.‌ ‌Call‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌say‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

or‌ ‌write‌ ‌them‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌

correction.‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Reading.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌perform‌ ‌(v)‌‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌biểu‌ ‌diễn‌ ‌

-‌ ‌performance‌ ‌(n)‌‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌buổi‌ ‌trình‌ ‌diễn‌ ‌

-‌ ‌puppeteer‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌người‌ ‌điều‌ ‌khiển‌ ‌con‌ ‌rối‌ ‌

-‌ ‌rural‌ ‌(adj)‌‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌nông‌ ‌thôn‌ ‌

-‌ ‌emotional‌ ‌(adj)‌‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌xúc‌ ‌cảm‌ ‌

-‌ ‌melodic‌ ‌(adj)‌‌ ‌‌:‌ ‌du‌ ‌dương‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Find‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌which‌ ‌

mean:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌special‌ ‌or‌ ‌different‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌started‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌showed‌ ‌or‌ ‌presented‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌countryside‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌events‌ ‌or‌ ‌celebrations‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌unique‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Began‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌performed‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌rural‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌festivals‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌text‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌again,‌ ‌

then‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌call‌ ‌on‌ ‌

some‌ ‌individuals‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌aloud‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌Check‌ ‌their‌ ‌pronunciation‌ ‌and‌ ‌

intonation.‌ ‌Explain‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌

clarify‌ ‌anything‌ ‌difficult.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌It‌ ‌began‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌11‌th‌‌ ‌century.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌It‌ ‌takes‌ ‌place‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌pool.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌controlled‌ ‌by‌ ‌puppetteers.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌of‌ ‌wood‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌They‌ ‌are‌ ‌about‌ ‌everyday‌ ‌life‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

countryside‌ ‌and‌ ‌about‌ ‌folk‌ ‌tales.‌ ‌

 ‌

‌‌Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌types‌ ‌of‌ ‌music‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌them‌ ‌then‌ ‌play‌ ‌game.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌other‌ ‌forms‌ ‌of‌ ‌

traditional‌ ‌arts‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌(‌ ‌or‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

region/‌ ‌world).‌ ‌Refer‌ ‌to‌ ‌famous‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌

arts‌ ‌in‌ ‌some‌ ‌countries‌ ‌(‌ ‌e.g.‌ ‌Lam‌ ‌Vong‌ ‌

dance‌ ‌of‌ ‌Laos,‌ ‌Chinese‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌opera,‌ ‌

ballet‌ ‌of‌ ‌France‌ ‌and‌ ‌Russia…)‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3‌:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌two‌ ‌

columns.‌ ‌

After‌ ‌that‌ ‌allow‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌time‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

about‌ ‌their‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌kind‌ ‌of‌ ‌music:‌ ‌what‌ ‌

kind‌ ‌they‌ ‌like‌ ‌best‌ ‌and‌ ‌why,‌ ‌whether‌ ‌they‌ ‌

play‌ ‌any‌ ‌musical‌ ‌instruments,‌ ‌when‌ ‌and‌ ‌

how‌ ‌often‌ ‌they‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌music,‌ ‌and‌ ‌how‌ ‌

music‌ ‌is‌ ‌useful‌ ‌to‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Game:‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌rules‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

game‌ ‌Tic‌ ‌Tac‌ ‌Toe‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Decide‌ ‌which‌ ‌partner‌ ‌is‌ ‌

X‌ ‌,‌ ‌which‌ ‌is‌ ‌O‌ ‌and‌ ‌who‌ ‌will‌ ‌go‌ ‌first.‌ ‌The‌ ‌

first‌ ‌player‌ ‌chooses‌ ‌a‌ ‌box‌ ‌and‌ ‌calls‌ ‌out‌ ‌a‌ ‌

number.‌ ‌

E.g:‌ ‌ ‌

Player‌ ‌1:‌ ‌“‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌number‌ ‌2”‌ ‌

Player‌ ‌2:‌ ‌OK,‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌in‌ ‌English!‌ ‌

Then‌ ‌he/she‌ ‌has‌ ‌to‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌in‌ ‌English.‌ ‌

If‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌player‌ ‌answers‌ ‌the‌ ‌question‌ ‌for‌ ‌

that‌ ‌box‌ ‌correctly‌ ‌he/‌ ‌she‌ ‌can‌ ‌put‌ ‌an‌ ‌X‌ ‌or‌ ‌

an‌ ‌O‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box.‌ ‌The‌ ‌first‌ ‌person‌ ‌to‌ ‌get‌ ‌

three‌ ‌Xs‌ ‌or‌ ‌three‌ ‌Os‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌row,‌ ‌wins!‌ ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Speaking‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌types‌ ‌of‌ ‌music‌ ‌in‌ ‌A‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

adjectives‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌them‌ ‌in‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌e‌ ‌2.‌ ‌a‌ ‌3.‌ ‌b‌ ‌4.‌ ‌c‌ ‌5.‌ ‌d‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Game:‌ ‌Tic‌ ‌Tac‌ ‌Toe‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

E.g:‌ ‌ ‌

Player‌ ‌1:‌ ‌“‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌number‌ ‌2”‌ ‌

Player‌ ‌2:‌ ‌OK,‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌in‌ ‌English!‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌C‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌4-‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌31:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌get‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌an‌ ‌artist.‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Write‌ ‌an‌ ‌informal‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌invitation.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Express‌ ‌agreement:‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌and‌ ‌be‌ ‌proud‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌tradidional‌ ‌art‌ ‌forms‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌music‌ ‌

and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌and‌ ‌say‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌know‌ ‌about‌ ‌Picasso.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌Tip‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ss,‌ ‌telling‌ ‌

them‌ ‌if‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌apply‌ ‌the‌ ‌

listening‌ ‌tip,‌ ‌then‌ ‌they‌ ‌must‌ ‌be‌ ‌given‌ ‌time‌ ‌

to‌ ‌take‌ ‌notes.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Then‌ ‌tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌and‌ ‌

say‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌know‌ ‌about‌ ‌Picasso.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Read:‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌tip:‌ ‌ ‌

When‌ ‌you‌ ‌listen,‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌useful‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌

notes.‌ ‌Try‌ ‌to‌ ‌note‌ ‌down‌ ‌the‌ ‌keywords‌ ‌(‌ ‌

important‌ ‌words).‌ ‌This‌ ‌helps‌ ‌you‌ ‌to‌ ‌

remember‌ ‌the‌ ‌main‌ ‌ideas.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌close‌ ‌their‌ ‌books.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌they‌ ‌should‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌note‌ ‌

down‌ ‌the‌ ‌keywords‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌notebooks.‌ ‌T:‌ ‌

Plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌listening‌ ‌once.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌learned‌ ‌about‌ ‌

Picasso.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌carefully‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

they‌ ‌hear‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌key.‌ ‌

Ex3;‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again.‌ ‌While‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

listen,‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌to‌ ‌circle‌ ‌A,‌ ‌B,‌ ‌or‌ ‌C‌ ‌for‌ ‌

their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌key.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌once‌ ‌more.‌ ‌

As‌ ‌a‌ ‌class,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌listening‌ ‌is‌ ‌

organised.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌Picasso‌ ‌

and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌artists‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌training‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌portrait‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌paintings.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌you’ve‌ ‌circled.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌

you‌ ‌know‌ ‌what‌ ‌all‌ ‌of‌ ‌these‌ ‌words‌ ‌mean?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌

choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌2.‌ ‌B‌ ‌3.‌ ‌A‌ ‌4.‌ ‌C‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌one‌ ‌more‌ ‌time.‌ ‌

As‌ ‌a‌ ‌class,‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌listening‌ ‌is‌ ‌

organized‌ ‌(‌ ‌according‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌timeline,‌ ‌the‌ ‌

order‌ ‌of‌ ‌important‌ ‌events,‌ ‌or‌ ‌another‌ ‌

way)‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌‌ ‌‌write‌ ‌an‌ ‌informal‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌invitation‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

Informal‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌invitation.‌ ‌

 ‌


-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌why‌ ‌they‌ ‌would‌ ‌write‌ ‌an‌ ‌

informal‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌invitation‌ ‌and‌ ‌to‌ ‌whom‌ ‌(‌ ‌

to‌ ‌invite‌ ‌sb‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌sthing,‌ ‌and‌ ‌to‌ ‌sb‌ ‌who‌ ‌

has‌ ‌close‌ ‌relationship‌ ‌to‌ ‌you)‌ ‌

The‌ ‌focus‌ ‌their‌ ‌attention‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌writing‌ ‌

tip.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌sample‌ ‌letter‌ ‌carefully,‌ ‌and‌ ‌

note‌ ‌down‌ ‌the‌ ‌useful‌ ‌expressions‌ ‌(cues)‌ ‌

for‌ ‌writing‌ ‌an‌ ‌informal‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌invitation.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌them‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌cues‌ ‌carefully,‌ ‌then‌ ‌practise‌ ‌

wriitng‌ ‌the‌ ‌letter.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌play‌ ‌special‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌

spelling‌ ‌and‌ ‌punctuation.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌collect‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌writing‌ ‌papers‌ ‌

and‌ ‌mark‌ ‌them,‌ ‌then‌ ‌give‌ ‌comments‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Writing‌ ‌tip‌ ‌

When‌ ‌you‌ ‌write‌ ‌an‌ ‌informal‌ ‌letter‌ ‌of‌ ‌

invitation,‌ ‌you‌ ‌use:‌ ‌

How‌ ‌about‌ ‌+‌ ‌V-ing‌ ‌?‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌letter‌ ‌and‌ ‌choose‌ ‌

the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A‌ ‌2.‌ ‌B‌ ‌

 ‌

5.‌ ‌Now‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌letter‌ ‌to‌ ‌invite‌ ‌a‌ ‌friend‌ ‌to‌ ‌

an‌ ‌art‌ ‌exhibition,‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌following.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Event:‌ ‌Exhibition‌ ‌of‌ ‌Modern‌ ‌Art.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Time:‌ ‌9‌ ‌o’clock,‌ ‌Saturday‌ ‌morning‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Place:‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌centre‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Time‌ ‌to‌ ‌meet:‌ ‌8.15‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Home‌ ‌work‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌Workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌and‌ ‌project.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌Arts‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌32:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌+‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌back‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary,‌ ‌

grammar,‌ ‌communication‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌project‌ ‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌‌ ‌comparisons:‌ ‌(not)‌ ‌as...as,‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as,‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Express‌ ‌agreement:‌ ‌too‌ ‌&‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌and‌ ‌be‌ ‌proud‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌tradidional‌ ‌art‌ ‌forms‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌writing‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌writing‌ ‌to‌ ‌check‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌introduce‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌art.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌two‌ ‌columns.‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

their‌ ‌mistakes.‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌Let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Tell‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌

the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌notebooks.‌ ‌Give‌ ‌

explanation‌ ‌if‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

the‌ ‌mistakes.‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌

passage‌ ‌in‌ ‌chorus‌ ‌or‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Vocabulary.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌column‌ ‌A‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

ones‌ ‌in‌ ‌column‌ ‌B.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌e‌ ‌2.‌ ‌c‌ ‌3.‌ ‌b‌ ‌4.‌ ‌a‌ ‌5.‌ ‌d‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌a‌ ‌word‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌gap‌ ‌to‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌music‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌arts‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌stages‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌go‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌films‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Use‌ ‌structures:‌ ‌As‌ ‌…as/‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as/‌ ‌different‌ ‌from.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌or‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌

and‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌

notebooks.‌ ‌T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Grammar.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌words/‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌gaps‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌art‌ ‌gallery‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌artistic‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌films‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌in‌ ‌person‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌sung‌ ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌first‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌

the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌they‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌

swap‌ ‌their‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌correction‌ ‌

and‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌red‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

aloud.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌

they‌ ‌can‌ ‌check‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

partner.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌these‌ ‌sentences,‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words‌ ‌in‌ ‌brackets.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌photograph‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌big‌ ‌as‌ ‌the‌ ‌

painting.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌My‌ ‌painting‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌expensive‌ ‌as‌ ‌this‌ ‌

painting.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌This‌ ‌picture‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

picture‌ ‌in‌ ‌our‌ ‌room.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌This‌ ‌film‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌the‌ ‌one‌ ‌we‌ ‌saw‌ ‌

last‌ ‌week.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌journey‌ ‌was‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌long‌ ‌as‌ ‌we‌ ‌

thought‌ ‌at‌ ‌first.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences,‌ ‌

using‌ ‌“too”‌ ‌or‌ ‌“‌ ‌either”‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌too‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌either‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌either‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌too‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌too‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal‌:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌then‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌art.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌project‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌6.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌and‌ ‌answers‌ ‌once‌ ‌or‌ ‌

twice.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌match‌ ‌them.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌role-play‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌and‌ ‌answers,‌ ‌then‌ ‌write‌ ‌all‌ ‌

sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌their‌ ‌notebooks.‌ ‌

Finish!‌ ‌ ‌

Finally‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

self-assessment.‌ ‌Identify‌ ‌any‌ ‌weakness‌ ‌

and‌ ‌provide‌ ‌further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌if‌ ‌necessary.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

This‌ ‌project‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌done‌ ‌as‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌

at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌

carefully.‌ ‌Explain‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌anything‌ ‌

difficult‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌sure‌ ‌they‌ ‌

understand‌ ‌everything‌ ‌thoroughly.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌independently.‌ ‌T‌ ‌encourages‌ ‌

them‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌their‌ ‌imaginations‌ ‌and‌ ‌make‌ ‌

their‌ ‌own‌ ‌paintings.‌ ‌T‌ ‌helps‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌organize‌ ‌a‌ ‌

painting‌ ‌shows‌ ‌among‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌members.‌ ‌

Write‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌to‌ ‌compare‌ ‌those‌ ‌

paintings.‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌1-6‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌A-F.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌B‌ ‌2.‌ ‌A‌ ‌3.‌ ‌E‌ ‌4.‌ ‌C‌ ‌5.‌ ‌D‌ ‌6.‌ ‌F‌ ‌

Finish!‌ ‌Now‌ ‌I‌ ‌can….‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

IV.‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌information‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Based‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌Dong‌ ‌

Ho‌ ‌paintings‌ ‌and‌ ‌your‌ ‌own‌ ‌ideas,‌ ‌draw‌ ‌a‌ ‌

picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌animals‌ ‌or‌ ‌the‌ ‌things‌ ‌around‌ ‌

you….‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌last‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌of‌ ‌unit‌ ‌4‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌5‌ ‌–‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A.........................‌ ‌

7B:………………‌ ‌ ‌

unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌34:‌ ‌GETTING‌ ‌STARTED‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives.‌ ‌

By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌content‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌different‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌food.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,some,any…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up:‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Let‌ ‌students‌ ‌review‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌which‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌about‌ ‌occupations‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Play‌ ‌game:‌ ‌“Who‌ ‌am‌ ‌I?”‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌to‌ ‌play:‌ ‌call‌ ‌a‌ ‌student‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌activities‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

guess:‌ ‌what‌ ‌is‌ ‌his‌ ‌job?‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Occupations‌ ‌

-‌ ‌singer‌ ‌

-‌ ‌artist‌ ‌

-‌ ‌teacher‌ ‌

-‌ ‌doctor‌ ‌

-‌ ‌cook‌ ‌

…‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation.‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌elicits‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌(pictures,‌ ‌

realias,‌ ‌situations‌ ‌….)‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌copy‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌newwords‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌by‌ ‌doing‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

2/49page:‌ ‌(How‌ ‌to‌ ‌play:‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌10‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌and‌ ‌

then‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words.‌ ‌Call‌ ‌about‌ ‌2‌ ‌students)‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌tofu(n):‌ ‌đậu‌ ‌phụ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌eel‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌con‌ ‌lươn‌ ‌

-‌ ‌mineral‌ ‌water‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌nước‌ ‌khoáng‌ ‌

-‌ ‌turmeric‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌củ‌ ‌gừng‌ ‌

-‌ ‌shrimp‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌tôm‌ ‌

-‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌trứng‌ ‌tráng‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Where‌ ‌are‌ ‌Phong‌ ‌and‌ ‌his‌ ‌Mum?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌they‌ ‌doing?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌there‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge?‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Introduce‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation:‌ ‌Today,‌ ‌

Phong’s‌ ‌mother‌ ‌and‌ ‌his‌ ‌father‌ ‌won’t‌ ‌be‌ ‌

home‌ ‌so‌ ‌Phong‌ ‌will‌ ‌have‌ ‌to‌ ‌eat‌ ‌dinner‌ ‌

alone.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌(twice)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌b/49‌ ‌page‌ ‌ ‌

(How‌ ‌to‌ ‌do:‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌

coversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌find‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌about‌ ‌Food‌ ‌

and‌ ‌Drink‌ ‌individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌give‌ ‌

sub-board‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌

groups‌ ‌(3‌ ‌groups)to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌&read:‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Find‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌about‌ ‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌Drink.‌ ‌

Food‌ ‌

Drink‌ ‌

meat‌ ‌

milk‌ ‌



 ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌a/49‌ ‌page‌ ‌

:‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Play‌ ‌game:‌ ‌“Lucky‌ ‌picture”‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌

(two‌ ‌groups)‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

tofu‌ ‌

Juice‌ ‌

fried‌ ‌vegetables‌ ‌

mineral‌ ‌water‌ ‌

bread‌ ‌

orange‌ ‌juice‌ ‌

noodles‌ ‌

 ‌

rice‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌his‌ ‌parents‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

opera‌ ‌tonight‌ ‌and‌ ‌they‌ ‌won’t‌ ‌be‌ ‌home‌ ‌

until‌ ‌9‌ ‌pm.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌There’s‌ ‌some‌ ‌rice‌ ‌left‌ ‌from‌ ‌lunch.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Phong‌ ‌should‌ ‌warm‌ ‌it‌ ‌up.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌She’ll‌ ‌buy‌ ‌some‌ ‌milk‌ ‌tomorrow.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌He‌ ‌can‌ ‌have‌ ‌some‌ ‌orange‌ ‌juice‌ ‌

instead‌ ‌of‌ ‌milk.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌more‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌and‌ ‌

repeat.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌adds‌ ‌some‌ ‌more‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌Lemonnade‌ ‌is‌ ‌sour‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌around‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌

about‌ ‌their‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌practise‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌report‌ ‌before‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌one‌ ‌student‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌his‌ ‌or‌ ‌her‌ ‌

favourite‌ ‌food‌ ‌or‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌The‌ ‌rest‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌adjectives.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌other‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌

acrid:‌ ‌hăng‌ ‌

limber‌ ‌:‌ ‌mềm‌ ‌

sickly‌ ‌:‌ ‌tanh‌ ‌

bland‌ ‌:‌ ‌nhạt‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌What’s‌ ‌your‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌beef‌ ‌noodle‌ ‌soup.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌When‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌usually‌ ‌eat‌ ‌it?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌In‌ ‌the‌ ‌morning.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌How‌ ‌is‌ ‌it?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌delicious‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

I‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌small‌ ‌survey‌ ‌with‌ ‌my‌ ‌classmate‌ ‌

about‌ ‌their‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌As‌ ‌a‌ ‌

result,‌ ‌Hoa‌ ‌said‌ ‌that‌ ‌her‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌is‌ ‌

noodle‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌good…….‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Game:‌ ‌What‌ ‌‘s‌ ‌your‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌

and‌ ‌drink?‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌my‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌a‌ ‌bit‌ ‌sour,‌ ‌

but‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌also‌ ‌sweet.‌ ‌

class‌ ‌tries‌ ‌to‌ ‌guess‌ ‌which‌ ‌food‌ ‌or‌ ‌drink‌ ‌it‌ ‌

is.‌ ‌

 ‌

B:‌ ‌Is‌ ‌it‌ ‌lemonade?‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Yes,‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌/‌ ‌No,‌ ‌try‌ ‌again.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌newords‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1:‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A.........................‌ ‌

7B:………………‌ ‌

 ‌

unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌35:‌ ‌A‌ ‌CLOSER‌ ‌LOOK‌ ‌1‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Use‌ ‌some‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌the‌ ‌pancake‌ ‌with‌ ‌some‌ ‌vegetables.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌pronouncing‌ ‌/o/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/‌ ‌fluently.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,some,any…‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌ ‌‌/o/‌ ‌-‌ ‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌song‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up:‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌

drink.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌sing‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song:‌ ‌‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌

 ‌

B.‌ ‌Presentation.‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌about‌ ‌

omlette‌ ‌and‌ ‌a‌ ‌pancake.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌uses‌ ‌some‌ ‌techniques‌ ‌to‌ ‌teach‌ ‌

vocabulary‌ ‌

 ‌

Checking:‌ ‌Rub‌ ‌out‌ ‌and‌ ‌remember:‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌the‌ ‌

instructions‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌an‌ ‌omlette‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

and‌ ‌then‌ ‌check‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌the‌ ‌

instructions‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌a‌ ‌pancake‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌columns‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌heat‌ ‌(v):‌ ‌đun‌ ‌nóng‌ ‌

-‌ ‌pour‌ ‌(v):‌ ‌rót‌ ‌

-‌ ‌fold‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌gấp,‌ ‌cuộn‌ ‌

-‌ ‌beat‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌đánh‌ ‌

-‌ ‌serve‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌phục‌ ‌vụ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌pepper‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌hạt‌ ‌tiêu‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌with‌ ‌

the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Beat‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Heat‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Pour‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Fold‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Serve‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

order‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Beat‌ ‌the‌ ‌eggs‌ ‌together‌ ‌with‌ ‌sugar,‌ ‌

flour,‌ ‌and‌ ‌milk‌.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Pour‌ ‌¼‌ ‌cup‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌mixture‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pan‌ ‌at‌ ‌a‌ ‌time.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Heat‌ ‌the‌ ‌oil‌ ‌over‌ ‌a‌ ‌medium‌ ‌heat‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌

frying‌ ‌pan.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Cook‌ ‌until‌ ‌golden.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Serve‌ ‌the‌ ‌pancake‌ ‌with‌ ‌some‌ ‌

vegetables.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

columns.‌ ‌ ‌

Dishes‌ ‌

Ingredients‌ ‌

pancake,‌ ‌beef‌ ‌

noodle‌ ‌soup,‌ ‌

spring‌ ‌rolls,‌ ‌

noodles,‌ ‌pork,‌ ‌

omelette,‌ ‌

sandwich.‌ ‌

salt,‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌oil,‌ ‌

flour,‌ ‌pork,‌ ‌

turmeric,‌ ‌pepper,‌ ‌

noodles.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice.‌ ‌


Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌‌ ‌‌pronounce‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌ ‌o‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Let‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌see‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌are‌ ‌

formed.‌ ‌

-Plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌ ‌

-Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌together.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌they‌ ‌hear‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌Pay‌ ‌

attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌o‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌/‌ ‌o‌ ‌/‌ ‌:‌ ‌soft,‌ ‌hot,‌ ‌bottle,‌ ‌pot,‌ ‌rod.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/‌ ‌:‌ ‌pork,‌ ‌salt,‌ ‌fork,‌ ‌sport,‌ ‌sauce.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌5.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

words‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌cod‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌port‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌sports‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌fox‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌short‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice.‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌instruction‌ ‌they‌ ‌know‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌the‌ ‌

instructions‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌meal‌ ‌they‌ ‌

know‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌next‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A.........................‌ ‌

7B:………………‌ ‌ ‌

unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌36:‌ ‌A‌ ‌CLOSER‌ ‌LOOK‌ ‌2‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Use‌ ‌‌How‌ ‌much‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌How‌ ‌many‌‌ ‌to‌ ‌ask‌ ‌about‌ ‌quantity.‌ ‌

 ‌-‌ ‌Distinguish‌ ‌countable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/‌ ‌uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌VietNam.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌Teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up:‌ ‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌which‌ ‌they’ve‌ ‌

learnt‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Two‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

adjectives‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌they’ve‌ ‌

learnt.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌person‌ ‌who‌ ‌writes‌ ‌more‌ ‌words‌ ‌is‌ ‌

winner.‌ ‌

Brainstorming:‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌difference‌ ‌between‌ ‌countable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌

uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some‌ ‌and‌ ‌any.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌difference‌ ‌between‌ ‌

countable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌

by‌ ‌using‌ ‌a‌ ‌pen,‌ ‌two‌ ‌pen,‌ ‌a‌ ‌ruler,‌ ‌two‌ ‌

rulers‌ ‌…‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌more‌ ‌examples.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Give‌ ‌notes‌ ‌For‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌we‌ ‌

can‌ ‌use‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌like‌ ‌a‌ ‌bottle‌ ‌of‌ ‌….‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ex1.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌Remind‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌refer‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Grammar‌ ‌Box.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Explain‌ ‌the‌ ‌use‌ ‌of‌ ‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some‌ ‌and‌ ‌any‌ ‌

by‌ ‌analyzing‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌and‌ ‌

examples‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌Box.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌countable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌

nouns‌ ‌

-‌ ‌For‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌we‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌

phrases‌ ‌like‌ ‌a‌ ‌bottle‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌piece‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌bar‌ ‌

of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌glass‌ ‌of‌ ‌,‌ ‌a‌ ‌kilo‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌bag‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌

of…‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Exercises‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌1.‌ ‌‌Key:‌ ‌

Countable:‌ ‌‌banana,‌ ‌apple‌ ‌

Uncountable:‌ ‌‌bread,‌ ‌beef,‌ ‌pepper,‌ ‌

pork,‌ ‌turmeric,‌ ‌spinach.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2.‌ ‌A,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some‌ ‌any‌ ‌

Note‌ ‌:‌ ‌ ‌We‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌‌some‌ ‌‌in‌ ‌an‌ ‌offer‌ ‌or‌ ‌

a‌ ‌request.‌ ‌

 ‌

Example:‌ ‌Would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌some‌ ‌

bananas?‌ ‌

Can‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌some‌ ‌milk,‌ ‌please?‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3:‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌to‌ ‌apply‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

Ex3.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌fill‌ ‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T:‌ ‌Explain‌ ‌

How‌ ‌many‌ ‌+‌ ‌(‌ ‌countable‌ ‌noun)‌ ‌Ns‌ ‌

How‌ ‌much‌ ‌+‌ ‌(uncountable‌ ‌noun)‌ ‌N‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex4,‌ ‌5‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌a/‌ ‌an‌ ‌/‌ ‌some‌ ‌or‌ ‌any‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌any‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌some‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌any‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌a‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌an‌ ‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌each‌ ‌blank‌ ‌with‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌

or‌ ‌How‌ ‌much.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5.‌ ‌M‌ake‌ ‌‌questions‌ ‌with‌ ‌How‌ ‌

much/‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌

‌‌Example:‌ ‌

How‌ ‌much‌ ‌milk‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌drink‌ ‌every‌ ‌

morning?‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal‌:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌write‌ ‌more‌‌ ‌‌related‌ ‌to‌ ‌food‌ ‌or‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌lets‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌play‌ ‌game‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌play‌ ‌

 ‌

Game:‌ ‌ ‌

One‌ ‌team‌ ‌writes‌ ‌words‌ ‌related‌ ‌

to‌ ‌food‌ ‌or‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌other‌ ‌team‌ ‌adds‌ ‌“some‌ ‌/a/‌ ‌

an”.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌ ‌

Team‌ ‌1:‌ ‌egg‌ ‌

Team‌ ‌2:‌ ‌an‌ ‌egg‌ ‌

…‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌:‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A.........................‌ ‌

7B:……………….‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌37:‌ ‌COMMUNICATION‌ ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives‌ ‌

By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌different‌ ‌types‌ ‌of‌ ‌

Vietnamese‌ ‌food,‌ ‌drink‌ ‌and‌ ‌recipes.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/‌ ‌uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌VietNam.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌Teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Divided‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌into‌ ‌two‌ ‌teams‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌

and‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Elicit‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌through‌ ‌

translation‌ ‌and‌ ‌situations.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌sticky‌ ‌rice:‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌xôi‌ ‌

-‌ ‌sauce:‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌nước‌ ‌sốt‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌predict.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Read‌ ‌aloud‌ ‌3‌ ‌times‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌have‌ ‌

students‌ ‌read‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

*Checking‌ ‌vocab:‌ ‌Rub-‌ ‌out‌ ‌and‌ ‌

remember‌ ‌

-‌ ‌sausage:‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌xúc‌ ‌xích‌ ‌

-‌ ‌yoghurt:‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌sữa‌ ‌chua‌ ‌

-‌ ‌tuna:‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌cá‌ ‌ngừ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌ham‌ ‌:‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌giăm‌ ‌bông‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌🡪‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌check‌ ‌

their‌ ‌predictions.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌First,‌ ‌have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

table‌ ‌carefully‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌note‌ ‌their‌ ‌

answers.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌find‌ ‌out‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌

have‌ ‌in‌ ‌common‌ ‌their‌ ‌partners.‌ ‌

 ‌

-Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌move‌ ‌around‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌different‌ ‌

classmates‌ ‌every‌ ‌question.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

‌‌2.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌celebrity‌ ‌chef,‌ ‌Austin‌ ‌

Nguyen‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌his‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food.‌ ‌

Which‌ ‌food‌ ‌in‌ ‌Extra‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌does‌ ‌

he‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about?‌ ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌your‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌

drinks?‌ ‌Write‌ ‌your‌ ‌answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌

below.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

My‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌is‌ ‌spring‌ ‌roll.‌ ‌

It‌ ‌tastes‌ ‌delicious.‌ ‌

.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌interview‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌about‌ ‌their‌‌ ‌‌favorite‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌report‌ ‌the‌ ‌results‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌ir‌ ‌interviews‌ ‌before‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex3.‌ ‌Interview‌ ‌three‌ ‌students‌ ‌about‌ ‌

their‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4.‌ ‌Report‌ ‌your‌ ‌results‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1:‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌made‌ ‌Pho,‌ ‌omplette‌ ‌and‌ ‌cook‌ ‌rice‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A.........................‌ ‌

7B:………………‌ ‌

 ‌

unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌38:‌ ‌SKILLS‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌a‌ ‌bowl‌ ‌of‌ ‌noodles‌ ‌“Pho”‌ ‌and‌ ‌omelette.‌ ‌

 ‌-‌ ‌Read‌ ‌for‌ ‌specific‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌Pho,‌ ‌a‌ ‌popular‌ ‌food‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/‌ ‌uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌VietNam.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up:‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌contents‌ ‌which‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌a‌ ‌bowl‌ ‌

of‌ ‌Pho.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌them:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌dish‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌it‌ ‌is?‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Which‌ ‌place‌ ‌is‌ ‌famous‌ ‌for‌ ‌this‌ ‌dish?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌the‌ ‌ingredients‌ ‌for‌ ‌it?‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌When‌ ‌do‌ ‌people‌ ‌often‌ ‌have‌ ‌it?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌it?‌ ‌Why‌ ‌or‌ ‌Why‌ ‌

not?‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌about‌ ‌“Pho”‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌uses‌ ‌some‌ ‌techniques‌ ‌to‌ ‌present‌ ‌new‌ ‌

words‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌understanding:‌ ‌Rub-out‌ ‌and‌ ‌

remember.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌New‌ ‌words:‌ ‌

stew‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌:‌ ‌hầm‌ ‌

bone‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌xương‌ ‌

broth‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌:‌ ‌nước‌ ‌luộc‌ ‌thịt,‌ ‌nước‌ ‌xuýt‌ ‌

boneless‌ ‌(adj)‌ ‌không‌ ‌xương‌ ‌ ‌

teaspoon‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌thìa‌ ‌cà‌ ‌phê‌ ‌

pinch‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌nhúm‌ ‌

ingredient‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌thành‌ ‌phần‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌reading.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌about‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌and‌ ‌rice.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Ex2:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌scan‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌feedback.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌note‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌found‌ ‌the‌ ‌

information‌ ‌that‌ ‌help‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌‌ ‌‌the‌ ‌list‌ ‌of‌ ‌

ingredients‌ ‌for‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

ingredients‌ ‌for‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌using‌ ‌

the‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

instructions‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

1.We‌ ‌can‌ ‌enjoy‌ ‌pho‌ ‌all‌ ‌kinds‌ ‌of‌ ‌meals‌ ‌

during‌ ‌a‌ ‌day,‌ ‌from‌ ‌breakfast‌ ‌to‌ ‌

dinner‌ ‌and‌ ‌even‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌late‌ ‌night‌ ‌

snack.‌ ‌

2.They‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌variety‌ ‌

of‌ ‌rice.‌ ‌

3.The‌ ‌broth‌ ‌for‌ ‌ph‌ ‌obo‌ ‌is‌ ‌made‌ ‌by‌ ‌

stewing‌ ‌the‌ ‌bones‌ ‌of‌ ‌cows‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌long‌ ‌

time‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌large‌ ‌pot.‌ ‌The‌ ‌broth‌ ‌for‌ ‌

pho‌ ‌ga‌ ‌is‌ ‌made‌ ‌by‌ ‌stewing‌ ‌chicken‌ ‌

bones.‌ ‌

4.It‌ ‌is‌ ‌boneless‌ ‌and‌ ‌cut‌ ‌into‌ ‌thin‌ ‌slices.‌ ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Speaking:‌ ‌

Ex3.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌list‌ ‌of‌ ‌ingredients‌ ‌

below.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

ingredients‌ ‌for‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette.‌ ‌What‌ ‌

ingredients‌ ‌do‌ ‌I‌ ‌need?‌ ‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌You‌ ‌need‌ ‌eggs,‌ ‌salt,‌ ‌pepper,‌ ‌oil‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌salt‌ ‌do‌ ‌I‌ ‌need?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌a‌ ‌pinch‌ ‌of‌ ‌salt‌ ‌

…‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4.‌‌ ‌‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌of‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌

cook‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette.‌ ‌

1.d‌ ‌2.e‌ ‌3.a‌ ‌4.‌ ‌b‌ ‌5.‌ ‌c‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌an‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌and‌ ‌rice‌ ‌


-T‌ ‌have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌practice‌ ‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌demonstrate‌ ‌before‌ ‌

whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌invites‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌comments‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌

T’s‌ ‌feedback.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌5.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌Practicing‌ ‌giving‌ ‌

instructions‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌a‌ ‌dish‌ ‌or‌ ‌

drink.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Write‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌a‌ ‌bowl‌ ‌of‌ ‌noodles‌ ‌“‌ ‌Pho”‌ ‌and‌ ‌omelette,‌ ‌and‌ ‌cook‌ ‌rice‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2:‌ ‌make‌ ‌notes‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌ ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date:‌ ‌7A.........................‌ ‌

7B:………………‌ ‌

unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌39:‌ ‌SKILLS‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌for‌ ‌specific‌ ‌information‌ ‌about‌ ‌different‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌food.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Write‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/‌ ‌uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌VietNam.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm-up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌to‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌rice‌ ‌or‌ ‌

omlette.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌mistakes‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌carefully‌ ‌

and‌ ‌remind‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌remember‌ ‌the‌ ‌name‌ ‌of‌ ‌

three‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌three‌ ‌dishes‌ ‌mentioned‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌listening.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌copy.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌listening‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌rubric‌ ‌and‌ ‌study‌ ‌the‌ ‌

table‌ ‌carefully.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌rubic‌ ‌and‌ ‌study‌ ‌the‌ ‌map‌ ‌

carefully.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

Chily‌ ‌

Pepper‌ ‌

Turmeric‌ ‌

Shrimp‌ ‌

eel‌ ‌

pork‌ ‌

rice‌ ‌noodles‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌

1.Match‌ ‌the‌ ‌places‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌dishes.‌ ‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌b‌ ‌2.‌ ‌a‌ ‌3.‌ ‌c‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌ingredients‌ ‌for‌ ‌each‌ ‌dish.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌banh‌ ‌tom‌ ‌:‌ ‌shrimp‌ ‌

-‌ ‌sup‌ ‌luon‌ ‌:‌ ‌eel,‌ ‌pepper,‌ ‌turmeric,‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌my‌ ‌quang‌ ‌:‌ ‌rice‌ ‌noodles,‌ ‌shrimp,‌ ‌pork‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌note‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌

where‌ ‌they‌ ‌live.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌notes‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌

popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌live.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌not‌ ‌have‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌full‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌and‌ ‌

they‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌abbreviations.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

II.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌notes‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌

foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌in‌ ‌your‌ ‌

neighbourhood.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Name‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌drink‌:‌ ‌Lemonade‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌‌Ingredients:‌ ‌‌lemon,‌ ‌sugar,‌ ‌warter,‌ ‌

ice‌ ‌

3.‌‌ ‌‌How‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌them‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Put‌ ‌sugar‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌glass.‌ ‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌

popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌live‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌water‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌glass.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Cut‌ ‌the‌ ‌lemon‌ ‌in‌ ‌half.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Wring‌ ‌the‌ ‌lemon.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Stir‌ ‌the‌ ‌mixture‌ ‌of‌ ‌water,‌ ‌lemon‌ ‌and‌ ‌

sugar.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Put‌ ‌more‌ ‌ice‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌glass‌ ‌if‌ ‌you‌ ‌

want.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌‌ ‌‌talk‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌live.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌a‌ ‌paragraph‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌

popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌live‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌writing‌ ‌tasks‌ ‌into‌ ‌your‌ ‌notebook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌E‌ ‌1,‌ ‌2‌ ‌(‌ ‌workbook‌ ‌)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌&‌ ‌Project‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

UNIT‌ ‌5:‌ ‌VIETNAMESE‌ ‌FOOD‌ ‌AND‌ ‌DRINK‌ ‌

Period‌ ‌40:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌and‌ ‌project‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Cover‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌unit‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Know‌ ‌some‌ ‌ways‌ ‌of‌ ‌using‌ ‌“‌ ‌a/‌ ‌an‌ ‌/‌ ‌some‌ ‌and‌ ‌any…”.‌ ‌

 ‌-‌ ‌Practise‌ ‌communication.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink,‌ ‌appearance‌ ‌and‌ ‌taste‌ ‌of‌ ‌different‌ ‌foods‌ ‌and‌ ‌drinks,‌ ‌

verbs‌ ‌for‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Nouns‌ ‌(countable/‌ ‌uncountable)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌a/an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌cooking.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌VietNam.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌

drinks‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌live‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌mistakes‌ ‌

 ‌

Talk‌ ‌some‌ ‌popular‌ ‌foods‌ ‌or‌ ‌drinks‌ ‌where‌ ‌

they‌ ‌live‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌the‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌

and‌ ‌add‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌or‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌

learnt‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌column.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Add‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌or‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌

learnt‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌column.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌ ‌

Dishes‌:‌ ‌omelette,‌ ‌pancake,‌ ‌beef‌ ‌noodle‌ ‌

soup,‌ ‌chicken‌ ‌noodle‌ ‌soup,‌ ‌rice,‌ ‌noodle‌ ‌

pork,‌ ‌sandwich,‌ ‌meat,‌ ‌tofu,‌ ‌bread,‌ ‌spring‌ ‌

roll…‌ ‌

Ingredients:‌ ‌‌shrimp,‌ ‌salt,‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌oil,‌ ‌

flour,‌ ‌Pork,‌ ‌turmeric,‌ ‌pepper,‌ ‌noodle,‌ ‌

vegetable,‌ ‌egg,‌ ‌meat,‌ ‌tofu…‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌carefully,‌ ‌and‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌them‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌verbs‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

box.‌ ‌

Phrases:‌ ‌‌a‌ ‌slice,‌ ‌a‌ ‌can,‌ ‌a‌ ‌bottle,‌ ‌a‌ ‌kilo,‌ ‌a‌ ‌

bar,‌ ‌a‌ ‌glass,‌ ‌a‌ ‌bag,‌ ‌a‌ ‌teaspoon,‌ ‌a‌ ‌

tablespoon…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌each‌ ‌gap‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌verb‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

box.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Fold‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Pour‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Beat‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Heat‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Serve‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌first.‌ ‌

 ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌3,4,5.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌write.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌comments‌ ‌and‌ ‌check‌ ‌

 ‌

Exercise‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌a/‌ ‌an‌ ‌or‌ ‌some‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌a‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌some‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌an‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌some‌ ‌

Exercise‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌

some‌ ‌or‌ ‌any.‌ ‌ ‌

1.any‌ ‌

2.some‌ ‌

3.any‌ ‌

4.some/‌ ‌any‌ ‌

5.any/‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

6. ‌

Exercise‌ ‌5.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌questions‌ ‌with‌ ‌How‌ ‌

many/‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌underlined‌ ‌

words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌milk‌ ‌is‌ ‌there‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌bottle?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌cans‌ ‌of‌ ‌lemonade‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌

need?‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌apples‌ ‌does‌ ‌Peter‌ ‌got‌ ‌in‌ ‌his‌ ‌

bag?‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌rice‌ ‌is‌ ‌there‌ ‌left‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

electric‌ ‌cooker?‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Students‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌and‌ ‌practice‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌


-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌role‌ ‌–‌ ‌play‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌Choose‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌(A-D)‌ ‌to‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌conversation.‌ ‌

Practice‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌

partner.‌ ‌

Key‌:‌ ‌

1-D‌ ‌2-B‌ ‌3-A‌ ‌4-C‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌project‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌remember‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌at‌ ‌home:‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌41:‌ ‌REVISION‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegde:‌ ‌

Review‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌knowledge‌ ‌in‌ ‌unit‌ ‌4‌ ‌and‌ ‌unit‌ ‌5.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌about‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts,‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌Comparisons,‌ ‌either/too;‌ ‌countable/uncountable‌ ‌nouns;‌ ‌a/‌ ‌an/‌ ‌

some/‌ ‌any‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Linguistic‌ ‌competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌

competence.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities‌:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts,‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌in‌ ‌VietNam.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌ ‌

-Teacher‌ ‌checks‌ ‌students’‌ ‌homework.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌students’‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌Sts‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌of‌ ‌unit‌ ‌4,5.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Chatting:‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌topic‌ ‌of‌ ‌

unit‌ ‌4,5.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

-Unit‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Music‌ ‌and‌ ‌arts‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌food‌ ‌and‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Chatting‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Who‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌actor?/‌ ‌actress?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌kind‌ ‌of‌ ‌music‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌food?‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌your‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌drink?‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌ ‌‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌uses‌ ‌of‌ ‌comparisons‌ ‌,‌ ‌countable‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌

nouns.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌sts‌ ‌to‌ ‌repeat‌‌ ‌‌comparisons.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌difference‌ ‌between‌ ‌

countable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌

by‌ ‌using‌ ‌a‌ ‌pen,‌ ‌two‌ ‌pens,‌ ‌a‌ ‌ruler,‌ ‌two‌ ‌

rilers…‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌more‌ ‌examples.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Give‌ ‌notes‌ ‌for‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌we‌ ‌

can‌ ‌use‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌like‌ ‌a‌ ‌bottle‌ ‌of‌…‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌retell‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌use:‌ ‌Too,‌ ‌

so,‌ ‌neither,‌ ‌either.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌retell‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌use:‌ ‌Too,‌ ‌so,‌ ‌neither,‌ ‌

either‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌examples.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Comparisons‌ ‌

-‌ ‌as‌ ‌+‌ ‌adj‌ ‌+‌ ‌as‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌that‌ ‌two‌ ‌things‌ ‌are‌ ‌

similar.‌ ‌

Not‌ ‌as‌ ‌+‌ ‌adj‌ ‌+‌ ‌as‌ ‌to‌ ‌mean‌ ‌something‌ ‌is‌ ‌

more‌ ‌or‌ ‌less‌ ‌than‌ ‌something‌ ‌else.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌same‌ ‌as…..to‌ ‌show‌ ‌similarity.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌that‌ ‌two‌ ‌or‌ ‌more‌ ‌

things‌ ‌are‌ ‌different.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Countable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌and‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌

nouns.‌ ‌

For‌ ‌uncountable‌ ‌nouns‌ ‌we‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌

phrases‌ ‌like‌ ‌a‌ ‌bottle‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌piece‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌bar‌ ‌

of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌glass‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌kilo‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌bag‌ ‌of,‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌

of…‌ ‌

*‌ ‌The‌ ‌ways‌ ‌to‌ ‌use‌ ‌of‌ ‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Too,‌ ‌so,‌ ‌neither,‌ ‌either‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌some‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌

T‌ ‌focuses‌ ‌on‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌T/F‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌statements‌ ‌first‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌scan‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌to‌ ‌find‌ ‌the‌ ‌

information‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌compare‌ ‌the‌ ‌information‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

statements‌ ‌

 ‌

Exercise‌ ‌D1‌ ‌–‌ ‌page‌ ‌40workbook)‌ ‌

(sachmem)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌F‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌T‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌T‌ ‌


Ss:‌ ‌Decide‌ ‌whether‌ ‌the‌ ‌statement‌ ‌is‌ ‌T‌ ‌or‌ ‌

F‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌write‌ ‌T/F‌ ‌on‌ ‌your‌ ‌paper‌ ‌test.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌reading‌ ‌comprehension:‌ ‌

 ‌

*Grammar:‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌first.‌ ‌

 ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌write.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌comments‌ ‌and‌ ‌checks‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌part‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌in‌ ‌

exercise’s‌ ‌book‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌F‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Exercise‌ ‌E1‌ ‌P34‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.The‌ ‌tickets‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌show‌ ‌cost‌ ‌too‌ ‌much.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Giang‌ ‌can’t‌ ‌paint‌ ‌as‌ ‌well‌ ‌as‌ ‌Khanh‌ ‌

can.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌A‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌children‌ ‌are‌ ‌attracted‌ ‌by‌ ‌

Charles‌ ‌Dickens’‌ ‌novels.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Her‌ ‌book‌ ‌is‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌mine.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌It‌ ‌only‌ ‌takes‌ ‌us‌ ‌half‌ ‌an‌ ‌hour‌ ‌to‌ ‌get‌ ‌to‌ ‌

the‌ ‌art‌ ‌gallery…‌ ‌

Ex:‌‌ ‌‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌some‌ ‌

or‌ ‌any.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌There‌ ‌aren’t‌ ‌…….bananas‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

fridge.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like…….milk?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Is‌ ‌there……..apple‌ ‌juice‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge?‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌They‌ ‌have‌ ‌got‌ ‌……apples‌ ‌but‌ ‌they‌ ‌

haven’t‌ ‌got‌ ‌………..sugar.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌I‌ ‌went‌ ‌fishing‌ ‌but‌ ‌I‌ ‌didn’t‌ ‌

catch……….‌ ‌fish,‌ ‌so‌ ‌we‌ ‌had……….‌ ‌

bread‌ ‌for‌ ‌dinner.‌ ‌

Keys‌ ‌

1.any‌ ‌

2.some‌ ‌

3.any‌ ‌

4.some/‌ ‌any‌ ‌

5.any/‌ ‌some‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Homework.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌‌ ‌‌review‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌4,5‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌a‌ ‌45-minute‌ ‌test‌ ‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌42:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌SECOND‌ ‌45-MINUTE‌ ‌TEST‌ ‌

 ‌

I.OBJECTIVES‌ ‌:‌ ‌ ‌

By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌T‌ ‌is‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌check‌ ‌their‌ ‌Ss’‌ ‌language‌ ‌knowledge,‌ ‌basic‌ ‌skills.‌ ‌

This‌ ‌will‌ ‌help‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌a‌ ‌suitable‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌approach.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowledge:‌ ‌

*Grammar:‌‌ ‌‌review‌ ‌

*Vocabulary:‌‌ ‌‌review‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Skills:‌ ‌‌Reading,‌ ‌writing,‌ ‌listening,‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌test‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌serious‌ ‌and‌ ‌strict‌ ‌manner‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌PREPARATION‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Teacher:‌ ‌‌Test‌ ‌paper,‌ ‌chalk…‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Students:‌ ‌‌pen,…‌ ‌

III.THE‌ ‌CONTENTS‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Matrix‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Test‌ ‌ ‌

Chủ‌ ‌đề‌ ‌

Nhận‌ ‌biết‌ ‌

Thông‌ ‌hiểu‌ ‌

Vận‌ ‌dụng‌ ‌

Cộng‌ ‌

TNKQ‌ ‌

TL‌ ‌

TNKQ‌ ‌

TL‌ ‌

TNKQ‌ ‌

TL‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Listening‌ ‌

Phonetic‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 Picass‌

o‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌8‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌4‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

Số‌ ‌

câu:‌ ‌4‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌

điểm:‌ ‌

1đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌

10%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌8‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌2đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

1đ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌10%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Language‌ ‌

Focus‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Vocabular‌

ies‌ ‌

Grammar‌ ‌

Vocabula-‌

ries‌ ‌

Phonetic‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌12‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌3đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌30%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:4‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm‌ ‌

:1đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌10%‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:8‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌

12‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

3đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌30%‌ ‌

Reading‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

Water‌ ‌

puppetry‌ ‌

 Water‌ ‌

puppet‌

ry‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌06‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌

06‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌

06‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌3đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

3đ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

3đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌30%‌ ‌




Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌

30%‌ ‌


 ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌30%‌ ‌

Writing‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Reorder‌ ‌

words‌ ‌or‌ ‌

phrases‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Comprasi‌

on‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌04‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:2‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

1đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ:‌ ‌

10%‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:2‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌

04‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌2đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

1đ‌ ‌

Số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌

2đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌10%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌

câu:‌ ‌30‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌14‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌12‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌câu:‌ ‌4‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌

câu:‌ ‌30‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌

điểm:‌ ‌10đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌4đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌4đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌điểm:‌ ‌2đ‌ ‌

Tổng‌ ‌số‌ ‌

điểm:‌ ‌

10đ‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌100%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌40%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌40‌ ‌%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌20%‌ ‌

Tỉ‌ ‌lệ‌ ‌

100%‌ ‌

2.The‌ ‌Test‌ ‌(45’)‌ ‌ ‌

A.Listening:‌ ‌

I.Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌and‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear‌ ‌(1.0‌ ‌m)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌

Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌see‌ ‌the‌ ‌‌cod/cord‌‌ ‌‌over‌ ‌there?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌

It‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌small‌ ‌‌pot/port‌.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌

Tommy‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌these‌ ‌‌spots/sports‌.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌

Where‌ ‌can‌ ‌I‌ ‌find‌ ‌the‌ ‌‌fox/forks‌?‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture,‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌fill‌ ‌the‌ ‌missing‌ ‌words‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌below‌ ‌

(1.0‌ ‌m)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌

When‌ ‌was‌ ‌Picasso‌ ‌born?‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌1880‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌1881‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌1896‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌1973‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌

What’s‌ ‌his‌ ‌job?‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

An‌ ‌artist‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

A‌ ‌teacher‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

A‌ ‌worker‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

A‌ ‌actor‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌

Picasso‌ ‌received‌ ‌artistic‌ ‌training‌ ‌from‌ ‌his‌ ‌father‌ ‌at_______.‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

seven‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

thirteen‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

twenty‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

thirty‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌

Where‌ ‌did‌ ‌Picasso‌ ‌die?‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌Malaga‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌Barcelona‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌Mougins‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

In‌ ‌London‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌Language‌ ‌Focus‌ ‌

I.Fill‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blanks‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌given‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌(1.0m)‌ ‌

anthem‌ ‌heat‌ ‌ ‌compulsory‌ ‌yoghurt‌ ‌

 ‌

1.English‌ ‌is‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌____________‌ ‌subject‌ ‌at‌ ‌school.‌ ‌

2.Vietnam’s‌ ‌national‌ ‌__________‌ ‌‌Tien‌ ‌Quan‌ ‌Ca‌‌ ‌was‌ ‌composed‌ ‌by‌ ‌Van‌ ‌Cao.‌ ‌

3.__________‌ ‌the‌ ‌frying‌ ‌pan‌ ‌and‌ ‌add‌ ‌cooking‌ ‌oil.‌ ‌

4.My‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌food‌ ‌is‌ ‌___________.‌ ‌

II.Choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌best‌ ‌answer‌ ‌A,B,C‌ ‌or‌ ‌D‌ ‌(2.0ms)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌

___________is‌ ‌a‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌art‌ ‌form‌ ‌in‌ ‌Vietnam.‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

Gangnam‌ ‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

Ballet‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

Dance‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

Water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌

My‌ ‌favourite‌ ‌__________‌ ‌is‌ ‌beef‌ ‌noodle‌ ‌soup.‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

drink‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

food‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

ingredient‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

seafood‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌

I‌ ‌don’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌banana,‌ ‌and‌ ‌she‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌like‌ ‌it,‌ ‌_________.‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

either‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

neither‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

too‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

so‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌puppets‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌_________‌ ‌wood‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌painted.‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

up‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

by‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

from‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

of‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌

Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌give‌ ‌me‌ ‌a‌ ‌bottle‌ ‌of‌ ‌__________?‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

salt‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

rice‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

pepper‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

cooking‌ ‌oil‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌

There‌ ‌aren’t‌ ‌_________‌ ‌eggs‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge.‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

any‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

some‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

a‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

an‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌

Which‌ ‌‌underlined‌ ‌sound‌‌ ‌is‌ ‌different?‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

musi‌c‌ian‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

o‌c‌ean‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

turmeri‌c‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

spe‌c‌ial‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌

____________milk‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌need?‌ ‌-‌ ‌Just‌ ‌a‌ ‌little.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

A.‌ ‌

How‌ ‌many‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

How‌ ‌much‌ ‌

C.‌ ‌

How‌ ‌often‌ ‌

D.‌ ‌

How‌ ‌

C.Reading‌ ‌

Vietnamese‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌unique‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌art‌ ‌form. It's‌ ‌said‌ ‌that‌ ‌“‌Not‌ ‌watching‌ ‌

a‌ ‌performance‌ ‌of‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌means‌ ‌not‌ ‌visiting‌ ‌Vietnam‌ ‌yet‌”.‌ ‌That’s‌ ‌why‌ ‌water‌ ‌

puppetry‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌must-see‌ ‌show‌ ‌for‌ ‌tourists‌ ‌in‌ ‌Vietnam. Watching‌ ‌this‌ ‌show‌ ‌can‌ ‌help‌ ‌you‌ ‌

escape‌ ‌from‌ ‌your‌ ‌busy‌ ‌life‌ ‌and‌ ‌refresh‌ ‌your‌ ‌minds‌ ‌with‌ ‌unforgettable‌ ‌moments.‌ ‌ ‌

During‌ ‌the‌ ‌shows,‌ ‌you‌ ‌can‌ ‌only‌ ‌see‌ ‌the‌ ‌puppets‌ ‌and‌ ‌a‌ ‌small‌ ‌folk‌ ‌orchestra‌ ‌of‌ ‌about‌ ‌7‌ ‌

people;‌ ‌the‌ ‌puppeteers‌ ‌stand‌ ‌behind‌ ‌a‌ ‌curtained‌ ‌backdrop‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌pool. All‌ ‌puppets‌ ‌are‌ ‌

made‌ ‌of‌ ‌fig‌ ‌wood‌ ‌which‌ ‌goes‌ ‌along‌ ‌well‌ ‌with‌ ‌water. Then‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌carved‌ ‌and‌ ‌

painted. The‌ ‌themes‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌shows‌ ‌are‌ ‌very‌ ‌familiar‌ ‌to‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌people. ‌They‌ focus‌ ‌

on‌ ‌the‌ ‌daily‌ ‌life‌ ‌of‌ ‌farmers‌ ‌and‌ ‌common‌ ‌aspects‌ ‌of‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌spiritual‌ ‌life.‌ ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌True‌ ‌(T)‌ ‌or‌ ‌False‌ ‌(F)‌ ‌(2.0ms)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌unique‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌art‌ ‌form‌ ‌in‌ ‌Vietnam.‌_______‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Tourists‌ ‌must‌ ‌see‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌show‌ ‌when‌ ‌traveling‌ ‌in‌ ‌Vietnam.‌_______‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌puppeteers‌ ‌stand‌ ‌next‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌pool‌ ‌to‌ ‌control‌ ‌the‌ ‌puppets‌_______‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌The‌ ‌themes‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌shows‌ ‌are‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌people.‌_______‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌(1.0m)‌ ‌

1.What‌ ‌is‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry?‌ ‌

🡪.......................................................................................................................................‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌the‌ ‌puppets‌ ‌made‌ ‌of?‌ ‌

🡪.......................................................................................................................................‌ ‌

D.Writing‌ ‌

I.Reorder‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌(1m)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌/‌ ‌do‌ ‌/‌ ‌need‌ ‌/‌ ‌apples‌ ‌/‌ ‌you?‌ ‌

🡪.......................................................................................................................................‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌tell‌ ‌/me‌ ‌/how‌ ‌to/‌ ‌Can/‌ ‌you/‌ ‌cook‌ ‌rice?‌ ‌ ‌

🡪.......................................................................................................................................‌ ‌

II.Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌without‌ ‌changing‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌(1m)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Classical‌ ‌music‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌modern‌ ‌music‌ ‌‌(different‌ ‌from)‌ ‌

🡪‌ ‌Classical‌ ‌music‌ ‌is........................................................................................................‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌Andes‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌range‌ ‌is‌ ‌more‌ ‌longer‌ ‌than‌ ‌The‌ ‌Himalayas‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌range‌ ‌‌(not‌ ‌

as…as)‌ ‌

🡪‌ ‌The‌ ‌Himalayas‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌range‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌........................................................................‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Teaching‌ ‌date‌ ‌7A:……………‌ ‌

7B:…………….‌ ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌43:‌ ‌CORRECTING‌ ‌THE‌ ‌SECOND‌ ‌45-MINUTE‌ ‌TEST‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lessson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Find‌ ‌the‌ ‌mistakes‌ ‌for‌ ‌all‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌which‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌done‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌45’‌ ‌

test‌ ‌and‌ ‌correct‌ ‌themselves.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Know‌ ‌the‌ ‌answer‌ ‌keys.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Encourage‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌study‌ ‌harder‌ ‌to‌ ‌get‌ ‌good‌ ‌mark‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌

writing‌ ‌test‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowledge:‌‌ ‌review‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌4‌ ‌to‌ ‌5‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Skills‌:‌‌ ‌Listening,‌ ‌speaking,‌ ‌writing‌ ‌and‌ ‌reading.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities‌:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌pay‌ ‌attention‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌study‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌serious‌ ‌and‌ ‌strict‌ ‌manner‌ ‌and‌ ‌be‌ ‌

self-conscious‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Teacher:‌‌ ‌Text-book,‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌real‌ ‌things...‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Students:‌‌ ‌Text-books,‌ ‌notebooks...‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure:‌  ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Organization:‌ ‌

-Greeting‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌attendance‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Check‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson‌:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌sts‌ ‌to‌ ‌rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌structures.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1‌ ‌:‌ ‌Giving‌ ‌general‌ ‌feedbacks‌ ‌(10’)‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌test‌ ‌paper‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌and‌ ‌

gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌general‌ ‌feedbacks‌ ‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌get‌ ‌the‌ ‌test‌ ‌paper‌ ‌and‌ ‌

Check‌ ‌again‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌summarize‌ ‌the‌ ‌common‌ ‌

corrects‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2‌ ‌:‌ ‌Correct‌ ‌the‌ ‌Test‌ ‌(25’)‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

*To‌ ‌correct‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌part‌ ‌

-‌T‌ ‌play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌to‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌check‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌give‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*To‌ ‌correct‌ ‌Use‌ ‌of‌ ‌Language‌ ‌

part‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌explains‌ ‌the‌ ‌answer‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*To‌ ‌correct‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌part‌ ‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌aloud‌ ‌the‌ ‌

reading‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌again‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

A.Listening‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌1.0m‌ ‌(0.25m/1sentence)‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

cod‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

port‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

3‌ ‌

sports‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

4‌ ‌

fox‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌1.0ms‌ ‌(0.25m/1sentence)‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

B‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

A‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

3‌ ‌

A‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

4‌ ‌

C‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

B-Language‌ ‌Focus‌ ‌

I.1.0ms‌ ‌(0.25m/1sentence)‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

Compulsory‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

Anthem‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

3‌ ‌

Heat‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

4‌ ‌

Yoghurt‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

I.2.0ms‌ ‌(0.25m/1sentence)‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

D‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

B‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

3‌ ‌

A‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

4‌ ‌

D‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

5‌ ‌

D‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

6‌ ‌

A‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

7‌ ‌

C‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

8‌ ‌

B‌ ‌

0.25‌ ‌

C-Reading‌ ‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌2.0ms‌ ‌(0.‌ ‌5m/1sentence)‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

T‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌


 ‌

*To‌ ‌correct‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌part‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌reminds‌ ‌the‌ ‌structure‌ ‌again‌ ‌

to‌ ‌explain‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

T‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

3‌ ‌

F‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

4‌ ‌

F‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌2.‌ ‌(0.5m‌ ‌/1sentence).‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

Vietnamese‌ ‌water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌

is‌ ‌a‌ ‌unique‌ ‌traditional‌ ‌art‌ ‌

form‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

All‌ ‌puppets‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌of‌ ‌fig‌ ‌

wood‌ ‌which‌ ‌goes‌ ‌along‌ ‌well‌ ‌

with‌ ‌water‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

D-Writing‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌2.‌ ‌(0.5m‌ ‌/1sentence).‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

How‌ ‌many‌ ‌apples‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌

need?‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

Can‌ ‌you‌ ‌tell‌ ‌me‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌

rice?‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌2.‌ ‌(0.5‌ ‌/1sentence).‌ ‌

N.‌ ‌o‌ ‌

Sentences‌ ‌

Ms‌ ‌

1‌ ‌

Classical‌ ‌music‌ ‌is‌ ‌different‌ ‌

from‌ ‌modern‌ ‌music‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

2‌ ‌

The‌ ‌Himalayas‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌

range‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌long‌ ‌as‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Andes‌ ‌mountain‌ ‌range‌ ‌

0.5‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*Homework:‌ ‌

-Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌:‌ ‌Unit‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌Started‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌44:‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Getting‌ ‌started‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌content‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌dialogue.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌such‌ ‌as‌ ‌“‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌

Literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.”‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌Passive‌ ‌voice‌‌ ‌;‌ ‌‌Give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌During‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌the‌ ‌contents‌ ‌of‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌learn.‌ ‌

-‌T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌some‌ ‌thing‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy‌ ‌and‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

+Who‌ ‌are‌ ‌they?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌they‌ ‌doing‌ ‌?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌What‌ ‌are‌ ‌theytalking‌ ‌about‌ ‌?‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌picture‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Elicit‌ ‌some‌ ‌newwords‌ ‌(Pictures,‌ ‌

realias,situations…)‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Call‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌sts‌ ‌read.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read.‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌New‌ ‌words‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌Quốc‌ ‌Tử‌ ‌

Giám‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Historic‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌nổi‌ ‌tiếng‌ ‌hoặc‌ ‌quan‌ ‌

trọng‌ ‌trong‌ ‌lịch‌ ‌sử‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Cultural‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌thuộc‌ ‌văn‌ ‌hóa.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Surround‌ ‌(v):‌ ‌bao‌ ‌quanh‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Definitely‌ ‌(adv)‌ ‌=‌ ‌completely.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌contents‌ ‌of‌ ‌dialogue‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises‌.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌&‌ ‌read:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌&‌ ‌read:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌feedback.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌again‌ ‌

and‌ ‌underline‌ ‌the‌ ‌things‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌needs‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌

and‌ ‌why.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌items‌ ‌they‌ ‌

would‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌with‌ ‌them.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

 ‌

a)‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌She‌ ‌is‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌visit‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌

Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌university‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌About‌ ‌one‌ ‌thousand‌ ‌years‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌/‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌11‌ ‌century.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌In‌ ‌the‌ ‌center‌ ‌of‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌It‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌cold.‌ ‌

b)‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌conversation‌ ‌again.‌ ‌

Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table.‌ ‌

Keys:‌ ‌

Things‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌needs‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌and‌ ‌why:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌clothes‌ ‌-‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌cold‌ ‌

-‌ ‌camera‌ ‌-‌ ‌take‌ ‌photos‌ ‌of‌ ‌interesting‌ ‌

things.‌ ‌

Things‌ ‌Mai‌ ‌doesn’t‌ ‌need‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌and‌ ‌

why‌ ‌not.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌an‌ ‌umbrella‌ ‌-‌ ‌cold‌ ‌(winter)‌ ‌and‌ ‌not‌ ‌

much‌ ‌sunlight‌ ‌and‌ ‌rain.‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Imagine‌ ‌that‌ ‌you‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌

take‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌temple‌ ‌or‌ ‌a‌ ‌pagoda.‌ ‌

a)‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌

items‌ ‌you‌ ‌would‌ ‌like‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌with‌ ‌

you.‌ ‌

b)‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

I’ll‌ ‌take‌ ‌warm‌ ‌clothes‌ ‌because‌ ‌it’ll‌ ‌be‌ ‌

cold.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌prepare‌ ‌things‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌about‌ ‌what‌ ‌to‌ ‌

take‌ ‌and‌ ‌what‌ ‌not‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌trip.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌about‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌plan‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌

place.‌ ‌

 ‌

Give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌to‌ ‌your‌ ‌partners.‌ ‌

Examples:‌ ‌ ‌

Partner‌ ‌A‌ ‌:‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌

Sapa.‌ ‌

Partner‌ ‌B‌ ‌:‌ ‌You’d‌ ‌better‌ ‌take‌ ‌warm‌ ‌

clothes‌ ‌because‌ ‌it’s‌ ‌cold.‌ ‌

3.Make‌ ‌arrangements‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌trip‌ ‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Where‌ ‌will‌ ‌you‌ ‌go?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌We’ll‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌Huong‌ ‌Pagoda.‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌When‌ ‌will‌ ‌you‌ ‌go?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌…..‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌Guides‌ ‌for‌ ‌homework‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌about‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌plan‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌

a‌ ‌place.‌ ‌

Examples:‌ ‌ ‌

Partner‌ ‌A‌ ‌:‌ ‌I‌ ‌want‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌Sapa.‌ ‌

Partner‌ ‌B‌ ‌:‌ ‌You’d‌ ‌better‌ ‌take‌ ‌warm‌ ‌clothes‌ ‌because‌ ‌it’s‌ ‌cold.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌45‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌2:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌1‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Know‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌pronouncing‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌/‌ ‌fluently.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌Passive‌ ‌voice‌‌ ‌;‌ ‌‌Give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌newwords‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌previous‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

Matching:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌match‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

pictures‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌Matching‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.d‌ ‌ ‌

2.c‌ ‌ ‌

3.e‌ ‌ ‌

4.b‌ ‌ ‌

5a‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌famous‌ ‌historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Uses‌ ‌some‌ ‌techniques‌ ‌to‌ ‌teach‌ ‌

vocabularies.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌read‌ ‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌‌ ‌‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌twice.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌guess‌ ‌the‌ ‌names‌ ‌of‌ ‌five‌ ‌sections‌ ‌(1-5)‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌

prepositions‌ ‌suggested.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌may‌ ‌ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

on‌ ‌the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌well‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌:‌ ‌giếng‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌stone‌ ‌tablet‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌bia‌ ‌đá‌ ‌

-‌ ‌pavilion‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌đình,‌ ‌tạ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌heritage‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌di‌ ‌sản‌ ‌

-‌ ‌architectural‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌thuộc‌ ‌kiến‌ ‌trúc.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌names‌ ‌in‌ ‌1‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌listen‌ ‌

to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Van‌ ‌Mieu‌ ‌Gate‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Khue‌ ‌van‌ ‌Pavilion‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Thien‌ ‌QuangTinh‌ ‌Well‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Doctor’s‌ ‌stone‌ ‌tablets‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌With‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner,‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌prepositions‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌below‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

Thien‌ ‌Quang‌ ‌Tinh‌ ‌Well‌ ‌is‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌middle‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌pronouncing‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌/‌ ‌fluently.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌models‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌dʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

first‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌play‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌practice‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌together‌ ‌

and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌

columns.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Pronunciation:‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌columns.‌ ‌Pay‌ ‌attention‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sounds‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌‌ ‌/.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌tʃ/‌‌ ‌:‌ ‌children,‌ ‌chair,‌ ‌architectural,‌ ‌

cultural,‌ ‌watch,‌ ‌teach,‌ ‌question.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌:‌ ‌job,‌ ‌jeans,‌ ‌engineer,‌ ‌heritage,‌ ‌

village.‌ ‌

 ‌


 ‌

-T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌repeat.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌sing‌ ‌the‌ ‌chant‌ ‌

 ‌

5.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌chant.‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌from‌ ‌5‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

sounds‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌:‌ ‌‌chicken,‌ ‌chop,‌ ‌cherry,‌ ‌chip,‌ ‌cheap,‌ ‌

cheaper,‌ ‌which,‌ ‌lunch.‌ ‌

/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌:‌ ‌‌orange,‌ ‌jam,‌ ‌juice,‌ ‌jill,‌ ‌John‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌find‌ ‌more‌‌ ‌‌some‌ ‌historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌find‌ ‌more‌‌ ‌‌Some‌ ‌historic‌ ‌

places‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answer‌ ‌with‌ ‌their‌ ‌friends‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌some‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌46:‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌3:‌ ‌A‌ ‌closer‌ ‌look‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌ ‌master‌ ‌the‌ ‌form,‌ ‌the‌ ‌use‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌‌ ‌‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive,‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌ ‌‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌During‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌describe‌ ‌the‌ ‌layout‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌

literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌understand‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌

explains‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌

is‌ ‌used.‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌copy‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌teaches‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌

explains‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌is‌ ‌

used.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌copy‌ ‌and‌ ‌gives‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

Active:‌ ‌People‌ ‌speak‌ ‌‌English‌‌ ‌all‌ ‌over‌ ‌the‌ ‌

world.‌ ‌

Passive:‌ ‌English‌ ‌is‌ ‌spoken‌ ‌all‌ ‌over‌ ‌the‌ ‌

world.‌ ‌

Form‌ ‌

‌‌Affirmative:‌ ‌ ‌

S‌ ‌+‌ ‌be‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ved/‌ ‌p2‌ ‌+‌ ‌(by‌ ‌sb).‌ ‌

Negative:‌ ‌ ‌

S‌ ‌+‌ ‌be‌ ‌not‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ved/‌ ‌p2‌ ‌+‌ ‌(by‌ ‌sb).‌ ‌

The‌ ‌use:‌ ‌

We‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌when‌ ‌

the‌ ‌action‌ ‌is‌ ‌more‌ ‌important‌ ‌than‌ ‌the‌ ‌

person‌ ‌who‌ ‌does‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

New‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

re‌lic‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌di‌ ‌tích‌ ‌

re‌gard‌‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌coi‌ ‌ ‌

con‌struct‌‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌=‌ ‌build‌ ‌

Em‌peror‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌hoàng‌ ‌đế‌ ‌

scho‌lar‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌người‌ ‌có‌ ‌học‌ ‌thức‌ ‌

e‌rect‌‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌xây‌ ‌dựng‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌The‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

S‌ ‌+‌ ‌was/were‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ved/p2‌ ‌+‌ ‌(by‌ ‌sb)‌ ‌

S‌ ‌+‌ ‌wasn’t/weren’t‌ ‌+‌ ‌Ved/p2‌ ‌+‌ ‌(by‌ ‌sb)‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually.‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌

participle.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌located‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌surrounded‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌displayed‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌taken‌ ‌


 ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌study‌ ‌the‌ ‌example‌ ‌to‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌

to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Groupwork‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Time:‌ ‌3‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Divide‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌into‌ ‌two‌ ‌teams‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌

presents‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Member‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌team‌ ‌will‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌

sentence‌ ‌with‌ ‌presents‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌The‌ ‌team‌ ‌which‌ ‌has‌ ‌right‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌

will‌ ‌win.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌4‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌the‌ ‌mistakes.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌and‌ ‌put‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌order.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌considered‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌

simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

‌‌Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Many‌ ‌precious‌ ‌relics‌ ‌are‌ ‌displayed‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Many‌ ‌old‌ ‌trees‌ ‌and‌ ‌beautiful‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌

are‌ ‌taken‌ ‌care‌ ‌of‌ ‌by‌ ‌the‌ ‌gardeners.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Lots‌ ‌of‌ ‌souvenirs‌ ‌are‌ ‌sold‌ ‌inside‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Khue‌ ‌Van‌ ‌pavilion‌ ‌is‌ ‌regarded‌ ‌as‌ ‌the‌ ‌

symbol‌ ‌of‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌is‌ ‌considered‌ ‌

as‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌important‌ ‌cultural‌ ‌and‌ ‌

historical‌ ‌places‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Using‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌box‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌

sentences.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌The‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌is‌ ‌

surrounded‌ ‌by‌ ‌brick‌ ‌walls.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌was‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌constructed‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌were‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌regarded‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌renamed‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Put‌ ‌the‌ ‌parts‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌below‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌order.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌

examples‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌text.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌D-C-‌ ‌A‌ ‌-B‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

present‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

places‌ ‌below‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌and‌ ‌

past‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌ ‌

‌‌Example:‌ ‌The‌ ‌One‌ ‌Pillar‌ ‌pagoda‌ ‌is‌ ‌

located‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌center‌ ‌of‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌One‌ ‌Pillar‌ ‌was‌ ‌pagoda‌ ‌built‌ ‌in‌ ‌1049.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌and‌ ‌grammar.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Comunication‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌47‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌4:‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to‌‌ ‌‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌should‌ ‌

do‌ ‌and‌ ‌shouldn’t‌ ‌do‌ ‌while‌ ‌taking‌ ‌tourist‌ ‌trips.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌Giving‌ ‌advice:‌ ‌should,‌ ‌shouldn’t‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌During‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌

Play‌ ‌game.‌ ‌

-Students‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌two‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

Team‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌“should”‌ ‌

Team2:‌ ‌Make‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌with‌ ‌“shouldn’t”‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Explain‌ ‌and‌ ‌give‌ ‌some‌ ‌advices‌ ‌

-Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌of‌ ‌

them‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌predict.‌ ‌

-Read‌ ‌aloud‌ ‌three‌ ‌times‌ ‌and‌ ‌then‌ ‌have‌ ‌

students‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌individualy.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Tips‌ ‌for‌ ‌trips.‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Giving‌ ‌advice‌ ‌

-in‌ ‌advance‌ ‌(adv)‌ ‌trước‌ ‌

-You’d‌ ‌better…..because…‌ ‌

-It’s‌ ‌a‌ ‌good‌ ‌idea‌ ‌to‌ ‌…..‌ ‌

because…‌ ‌

-I‌ ‌think‌ ‌you‌ ‌should……‌ ‌

-You’d‌ ‌better…..so‌ ‌(that)…..‌ ‌

Eg:You’d‌ ‌better‌ ‌book‌ ‌a‌ ‌hotel‌ ‌in‌ ‌advance‌ ‌

so‌ ‌that‌ ‌you‌ ‌are‌ ‌sure‌ ‌you‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌room.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Give‌ ‌some‌ ‌advices‌ ‌for‌ ‌trips.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually:‌ ‌Imagine‌ ‌some‌ ‌

overseas‌ ‌friends‌ ‌are‌ ‌planning‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌

Noi.‌ ‌Advice‌ ‌them‌ ‌what‌ ‌they‌ ‌should‌ ‌and‌ ‌

shouldn’t‌ ‌do.Write‌ ‌Do‌ ‌or‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌

box.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Then‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.Give‌ ‌advice.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

a.‌ ‌Imagine‌ ‌some‌ ‌overseas‌ ‌friends‌ ‌are‌ ‌

planning‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi.‌ ‌Advise‌ ‌them‌ ‌

what‌ ‌they‌ ‌should‌ ‌and‌ ‌shouldn’t‌ ‌do.‌ ‌

Write‌ ‌Do‌ ‌or‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌in‌ ‌each‌ ‌box.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌ ‌

8.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌

9.‌ ‌Don’t‌ ‌ ‌

10.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Give‌ ‌advice‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌have‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌to‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi‌ ‌

next‌ ‌week.‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌you‌ ‌shouldn’t‌ ‌swim‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌

lakes‌ ‌because‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌deep.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Aim:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌

Game‌ ‌cards.‌ ‌

-Preparation:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌have‌ ‌five‌ ‌piece‌ ‌of‌ ‌paper‌ ‌

on‌ ‌which‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌are‌ ‌

written:‌ ‌grow‌ ‌rice,speak‌ ‌English,‌ ‌keep‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Game‌ ‌cards.‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Instructions:‌ ‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌


the‌ ‌keys‌ ‌here,‌ ‌visit‌ ‌Van‌ ‌Mieu,‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌

home‌ ‌work‌ ‌,‌ ‌grow‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌and‌ ‌trees…‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌explain‌ ‌how‌ ‌the‌ ‌game‌ ‌is‌ ‌played‌ ‌(Each‌ ‌

studentin‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌group‌ ‌chooses‌ ‌one‌ ‌

card‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌random.She/he‌ ‌shows‌ ‌the‌ ‌

card‌ ‌and‌ ‌makes‌ ‌a‌ ‌sentence‌ ‌with‌ ‌phase‌ ‌

written‌ ‌on‌ ‌it‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

passive‌ ‌voice.‌ ‌

 ‌

S1:‌ ‌They‌ ‌grow‌ ‌a‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌trees‌ ‌and‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

S2:‌ ‌A‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌trees‌ ‌and‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌are‌ ‌grown‌ ‌

in‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

..‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Find‌ ‌out‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Acadamy.‌ ‌

+‌ ‌When‌ ‌was‌ ‌it‌ ‌founded?‌ ‌

+‌ ‌Who‌ ‌was‌ ‌on‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌famous‌ ‌teachers‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Acadamy?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌48‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌5:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌1‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Know‌ ‌about‌ ‌some‌ ‌famous‌ ‌scholars‌ ‌and‌ ‌Emperors‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Read‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌university‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌for‌ ‌specific‌ ‌

information.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌Giving‌ ‌advice:‌ ‌should,‌ ‌shouldn’t‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌During‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌should,‌ ‌

shouln’t‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌some‌ ‌vocabulary‌‌ ‌‌words‌‌ ‌‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Acadamy.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌uses‌ ‌some‌ ‌techniques‌ ‌to‌ ‌present‌ ‌new‌ ‌

words.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌understanding:‌ ‌Rub-‌ ‌out‌ ‌and‌ ‌

remember.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌and‌ ‌

discuss‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature-‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy‌ ‌is‌ ‌a‌ ‌good‌ ‌English‌ ‌

name‌ ‌for‌ ‌Van‌ ‌Mieu‌ ‌-‌ ‌Quoc‌ ‌Giam?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Why‌ ‌do‌ ‌many‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌pay‌ ‌a‌ ‌visit‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy‌ ‌before‌ ‌their‌ ‌exam?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌What‌ ‌do‌ ‌you‌ ‌think‌ ‌will‌ ‌happen‌ ‌to‌ ‌this‌ ‌

historic‌ ‌place‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌future?‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌

*‌ ‌Vocabulary.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌sattue‌ ‌(n)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌recognize‌ ‌(v)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌recognition(n)‌ ‌

-reconstruct(v)‌ ‌=‌ ‌rebuild‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex1.‌ ‌Before‌ ‌you‌ ‌read,‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌

and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions:‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌read‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Acadamy‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌scan‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌to‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌feedback.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌note‌ ‌where‌ ‌they‌ ‌found‌ ‌the‌ ‌

information‌ ‌that‌ ‌help‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌match.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Summary‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Acadamy.‌ ‌

-When‌ ‌was‌ ‌it‌ ‌founded?‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌In‌ ‌1076‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Because‌ ‌thousands‌ ‌of‌ ‌Vietnamese‌ ‌

scholars‌ ‌graduated‌ ‌from‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Chu‌ ‌Van‌ ‌An‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌It‌ ‌was‌ ‌considered‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌university‌ ‌in‌ ‌

Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌

match‌ ‌the‌ ‌time‌ ‌in‌ ‌A‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌events‌ ‌in‌ ‌

B.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Who‌ ‌was‌ ‌on‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌famous‌ ‌

teachers‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Acadamy?‌ ‌

1D‌ ‌2A‌ ‌3B‌ ‌4C‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌four‌ ‌famous‌ ‌people‌ ‌by‌ ‌looking‌ ‌the‌ ‌four‌ ‌statues.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌4‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌And‌ ‌

ask‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌give‌ ‌answers‌ ‌in‌ ‌front‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌The‌ ‌rest‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌listens‌ ‌and‌ ‌

gives‌ ‌comments.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌key‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌check.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌four‌ ‌statues‌ ‌and‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

about‌ ‌them.‌ ‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌is‌ ‌considered‌ ‌

the‌ ‌founder‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

-Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Nhan‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌is‌ ‌regarded‌ ‌as‌ ‌

the‌ ‌builder‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

-The‌ ‌erection‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌doctors’‌ ‌stone‌ ‌

table‌ ‌was‌ ‌ordered‌ ‌by‌ ‌King‌ ‌Le‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌

Tong.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

-Learn‌ ‌by‌ ‌heart‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

-Do‌ ‌ex.‌ ‌D1,2,3‌ ‌(‌ ‌workbook)‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next:‌ ‌Find‌ ‌about:‌ ‌CHU‌ ‌VAN‌ ‌AN‌ ‌(age,‌ ‌job,‌ ‌birthplace…)‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌49‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌6:‌ ‌Skills‌ ‌2‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌a‌ ‌famous‌ ‌person‌ ‌for‌ ‌specific‌ ‌information.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌short‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌a‌ ‌historic‌ ‌place.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌tense‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌During‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌and‌ ‌lead‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about:‌ ‌CHU‌ ‌

VAN‌ ‌AN‌ ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌introduces‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Questions‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌you‌ ‌know‌ ‌Who‌ ‌is‌ ‌this?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌When‌ ‌and‌ ‌where‌ ‌was‌ ‌he‌ ‌born?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌his‌ ‌job?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌When‌ ‌did‌ ‌he‌ ‌die?‌ ‌

-‌ ‌…‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentaion‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌Chu‌ ‌Van‌ ‌An‌ ‌-‌ ‌a‌ ‌famous‌ ‌person‌ ‌for‌ ‌

specific‌ ‌information‌ ‌and‌ ‌summary‌ ‌again.‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌uses‌ ‌some‌ ‌

techiques‌ ‌to‌ ‌present‌ ‌some‌ ‌new‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌read‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌appropriate‌ ‌answer‌ ‌.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌read‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

Then‌ ‌correct.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌ask‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Listening.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Dis‌trict‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌huyện‌ ‌

-‌ ‌doc‌toral‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌thuộc‌ ‌tiến‌ ‌sỹ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌re‌gional‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌thuộc‌ ‌vùng‌ ‌

-‌ ‌roy‌al‌ ‌(adj):‌ ‌thuộc‌ ‌hoàng‌ ‌gia‌ ‌

-‌ ‌ca‌reer‌‌ ‌(n):‌ ‌sự‌ ‌nghiệp‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌(A,B‌ ‌or‌ ‌C).‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1-C‌ ‌2-B‌ ‌3-B‌ ‌4-A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex2:‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌

questions‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌in‌ ‌1292‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌He‌ ‌was‌ ‌an‌ ‌honest‌ ‌man.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌He‌ ‌continued‌ ‌his‌ ‌career‌ ‌and‌ ‌wrote‌ ‌

books.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌78‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌summaries‌ ‌about‌ ‌Chu‌ ‌Van‌ ‌An‌ ‌first.‌ ‌And‌ ‌

then‌ ‌asks‌ ‌them‌ ‌to‌ ‌summary‌ ‌about‌ ‌Chu‌ ‌

Van‌ ‌An.‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌Chu‌ ‌Van‌ ‌An‌ ‌was‌ ‌born‌ ‌in‌ ‌1292‌ ‌in‌ ‌

Thanh‌ ‌Tri‌ ‌district‌ ‌,‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi...‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌Chu‌ ‌Van‌ ‌An.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Suggestion:‌ ‌Mindmap‌ ‌

CHU‌ ‌VAN‌ ‌AN‌ ‌

-‌ ‌in‌ ‌1292‌ ‌

-‌ ‌in‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌Tri‌ ‌District,‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi‌ ‌

-‌ ‌an‌ ‌honest‌ ‌man‌ ‌

-‌ ‌the‌ ‌royal‌ ‌examination‌ ‌

-‌ ‌most‌ ‌famous‌ ‌teacher‌ ‌

-‌ ‌taught‌ ‌many‌ ‌successful‌ ‌students‌ ‌

-‌ ‌resigned‌ ‌and‌ ‌returned‌ ‌

continued‌ ‌his‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌career‌ ‌and‌ ‌

wrote‌ ‌books‌ ‌

-‌ ‌in‌ ‌1370‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌complete‌‌ ‌a‌ ‌short‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌a‌ ‌historic‌ ‌place‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌

short‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌discuss‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌to‌ ‌find‌ ‌the‌ ‌

information‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌guides‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy‌ ‌and‌ ‌write‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌a‌ ‌short‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌

the‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌their‌ ‌writing‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌computer‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌–‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

1070‌ ‌-‌ ‌Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌

1076‌ ‌-‌ ‌First‌ ‌university‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌

1484‌ ‌-‌ ‌King‌ ‌Le‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌

2003‌ ‌-‌ ‌Founders‌ ‌and‌ ‌developers‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

Eg:‌ ‌

In‌ ‌1070,‌ ‌The‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌was‌ ‌

established‌ ‌by‌ ‌Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌

Tong.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌famous‌ ‌

historic‌ ‌and‌ ‌cultural‌ ‌sites‌ ‌of‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌


-T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌

Academy‌ ‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌it‌ ‌

T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

Hi‌ ‌class,‌ ‌To‌ ‌day,‌ ‌I‌ ‌am‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌tell‌ ‌you‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌

Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌In‌ ‌

1070,‌ ‌The‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌was‌ ‌

established‌ ‌by‌ ‌Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌

Tong.‌ ‌It‌ ‌is‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌famous‌ ‌

historic‌ ‌and‌ ‌cultural‌ ‌sites‌ ‌of‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Guides‌ ‌for‌ ‌homework‌ ‌ ‌

-Do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌E‌ ‌1,‌ ‌2‌ ‌(‌ ‌workbook‌ ‌)‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌&‌ ‌Project‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌50‌ ‌

UNIT‌ ‌6:‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌UNIVERSITY‌ ‌IN‌ ‌VIETNAM‌ ‌

Lesson‌ ‌7:‌ ‌Looking‌ ‌back‌ ‌and‌ ‌project‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌able‌ ‌to:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Cover‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌unit‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercises;‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌passive‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌

exercises‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicate.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Historic‌ ‌places‌ ‌and‌ ‌things,‌ ‌things‌ ‌to‌ ‌take‌ ‌on‌ ‌a‌ ‌trip‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌tense‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying‌‌ ‌‌and‌ ‌more‌ ‌aware‌ ‌of‌ ‌protecting‌ ‌

their‌ ‌school.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌‌During‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1:‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌history‌ ‌

of‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌-‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Imperial‌ ‌Academy‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌answer‌ ‌the‌ ‌questions‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌What‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌of‌ ‌Academy?‌ ‌

(It’s‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌university‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam)‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Who‌ ‌was‌ ‌one‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌most‌ ‌famous‌ ‌

teachers‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy?‌ ‌

(Chu‌ ‌Van‌ ‌An)‌ ‌

…‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Presentation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Understand‌ ‌the‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌on‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌

and‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌participle‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌verbs.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Vocabulary‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌participle‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌verbs.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌ ‌

Base‌ ‌Form‌ ‌

Past‌ ‌Participle‌ ‌

Sell‌ ‌

sold‌ ‌

grow‌ ‌

grew‌ ‌

speak‌ ‌

spoke‌ ‌

buy‌ ‌

bought‌ ‌

build‌ ‌

built‌ ‌

see‌ ‌

Saw‌ ‌

 ‌

2.‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌

past‌ ‌participle‌ ‌form.‌ ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌considered,‌ ‌stated‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌named‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌spoken‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌located‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌recognized‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Practice‌ ‌

Aim:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌understand‌ ‌and‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌about‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌work‌ ‌individually‌ ‌first.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌3.‌ ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Call‌ ‌some‌ ‌students‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Change‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌active‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

present‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

Key:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌corrects.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌4‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌go‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌board‌ ‌and‌ ‌write.‌ ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

1.‌ ‌Tickets‌ ‌are‌ ‌sold‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌gate‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

tourist‌ ‌site.‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌A‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌are‌ ‌grown‌ ‌in‌ ‌Da‌ ‌Lat‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌The‌ ‌Hung‌ ‌King’s‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌is‌ ‌visited‌ ‌

by‌ ‌thousands‌ ‌of‌ ‌people‌ ‌every‌ ‌day.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Many‌ ‌beautiful‌ ‌Cham‌ ‌Towers‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌

seen‌ ‌by‌ ‌tourists‌ ‌in‌ ‌Binh‌ ‌Duong‌ ‌

province.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌many‌ ‌kinds‌ ‌of‌ ‌goods‌ ‌can‌ ‌be‌ ‌bought‌ ‌

by‌ ‌tourists‌ ‌in‌ ‌Ben‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌Market.‌ ‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Change‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌

simple‌ ‌passive‌ ‌into‌ ‌the‌ ‌past‌ ‌simple‌ ‌

active.‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Thai‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌founded‌ ‌One‌ ‌

Pillar‌ ‌Pagoda.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Emperor‌ ‌Ly‌ ‌Nhan‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌constructed‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Imperial‌ ‌Academy.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌King‌ ‌Le‌ ‌Thanh‌ ‌Tong‌ ‌ordered‌ ‌the‌ ‌

erection‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌Doctor’s‌ ‌stone‌ ‌

tablet.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌They‌ ‌built‌ ‌Tan‌ ‌Ky‌ ‌House‌ ‌in‌ ‌Hoi‌ ‌An‌ ‌

two‌ ‌centuries‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌They‌ ‌completed‌ ‌the‌ ‌construction‌ ‌of‌ ‌

Tu‌ ‌Duc‌ ‌Tomb‌ ‌in‌ ‌1876.‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Further‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

Aim:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌and‌ ‌the‌ ‌

Imperial‌ ‌Acadamy.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

table.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌students‌ ‌to‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌table‌ ‌and‌ ‌

give‌ ‌questions.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌report‌ ‌your‌ ‌discussions,‌ ‌using‌ ‌

the‌ ‌table.‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Communication‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌

the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature-‌ ‌ ‌

‌‌Eg:‌ ‌ ‌

A:‌ ‌Where‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature?‌ ‌

B:‌ ‌It’s‌ ‌located‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌centre‌ ‌of‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi.‌ ‌

..‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Report‌ ‌your‌ ‌discussions,‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌

information‌ ‌in‌ ‌5.‌ ‌

Example:‌ ‌

The‌ ‌Temple‌ ‌of‌ ‌Literature‌ ‌is‌ ‌located‌ ‌in‌ ‌

the‌ ‌centre‌ ‌of‌ ‌Ha‌ ‌Noi.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌Project‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌2‌.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌51:‌ ‌REVIEW‌ ‌2‌ ‌(LANGUAGE)‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌language‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌

include:‌ ‌pronunciation,‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌and‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌4-5‌ ‌by‌ ‌

doing‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌unit‌ ‌5,6‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌passive‌ ‌

c.‌ ‌Pronunciation:‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌/,‌ ‌‌/‌ ‌o‌ ‌/‌‌ ‌and‌ ‌‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Checking:‌‌ ‌‌Check‌ ‌15‌ ‌minutes‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌1‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Odd‌ ‌one‌ ‌out.‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌temple‌B.‌ ‌tomb‌C.‌ ‌pogoda‌D.‌ ‌visit‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌teacher‌B.‌ ‌doctor‌C.‌ ‌farmer‌D.‌ ‌school‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌located‌B.‌ ‌vissited‌C.‌ ‌known‌D.‌ ‌worked‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌teach‌B.‌ ‌education‌C.‌ ‌learn‌D.‌ ‌study‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any‌,‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌……………tea?‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌There‌ ‌is‌ ‌……………..egg‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌There‌ ‌isn’t‌ ‌……………………‌ ‌milk‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌………………bottle‌ ‌of‌ ‌water‌ ‌in‌ ‌my‌ ‌bag.‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌(2pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌They‌ ‌built‌ ‌that‌ ‌house‌ ‌in‌ ‌2014‌ ‌

That‌ ‌house‌ ‌....................................................................................................................‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌She‌ ‌cleans‌ ‌this‌ ‌room‌ ‌regulary.‌ ‌

This‌ ‌room‌ ‌...................................................................................................................‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌2‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Odd‌ ‌one‌ ‌out.‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌University‌B.‌ ‌worker‌C.doctor‌D.‌ ‌teacher.‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌in‌B.‌ ‌on‌C.‌ ‌an‌D.‌ ‌behind‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌started‌B.‌ ‌seen‌C.bought‌D.‌ ‌gone‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌chicken‌B.‌ ‌pork‌C.‌ ‌beef‌D.‌ ‌cheap‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌and‌ ‌any‌‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌There‌ ‌are‌ ‌…………..eggs‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌………………..cup‌ ‌of‌ ‌coffee?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Is‌ ‌there‌ ‌…………………….milk?‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌I‌ ‌have‌ ‌……………….orrange.‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌(2pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌My‌ ‌sister‌ ‌opens‌ ‌the‌ ‌door.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌door‌ ‌..................................................................................................................‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌People‌ ‌built‌ ‌this‌ ‌university‌ ‌in‌ ‌2000.‌ ‌

This‌ ‌university‌ ‌.......................................................................................................‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌3‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Odd‌ ‌one‌ ‌out.‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌temple‌B.‌ ‌go‌C.‌ ‌study‌D.‌ ‌visit‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌school‌B.‌ ‌university‌C.college‌D.‌ ‌singer‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌taken‌B.‌ ‌bought‌C.‌ ‌visited‌D.‌ ‌seen‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌chicken‌B.beef‌C.‌ ‌pork‌D.‌ ‌pepper‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌and‌ ‌any‌‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌She‌ ‌has‌ ‌………………..orrange‌ ‌in‌ ‌her‌ ‌bag‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Would‌ ‌you‌ ‌like‌ ‌………………..coffee?‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌There‌ ‌is‌ ‌……………………..milk‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌There‌ ‌isn’t‌ ‌………………….eggs‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌fridge.‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌(2pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌gardeners‌ ‌take‌ ‌care‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌everyday.‌ ‌

The‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌..........................................................................................‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌I‌ ‌bought‌ ‌that‌ ‌bike‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌

That‌ ‌bike‌ ‌.............................................................................................‌ ‌

KEYS:‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌1‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Odd‌ ‌one‌ ‌out.‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌visit‌2.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌school‌3.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌known‌4.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌education‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌any‌,‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌some‌ ‌2.‌ ‌an‌ ‌3.‌ ‌any‌ ‌4.‌ ‌a‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌(2pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌That‌ ‌house‌ ‌was‌ ‌built‌ ‌in‌ ‌2014.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌This‌ ‌room‌ ‌is‌ ‌cleaned‌ ‌regulary.‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌2‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Odd‌ ‌one‌ ‌out.‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌University‌2.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌an‌3.‌ ‌A.started‌4.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌cheap‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌and‌ ‌any‌‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌some‌2.‌ ‌a‌3.‌ ‌any‌4.‌ ‌an‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌(2pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌door‌ ‌is‌ ‌opened‌ ‌by‌ ‌my‌ ‌sister.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌This‌ ‌university‌ ‌was‌ ‌built‌ ‌in‌ ‌2000‌ ‌

Code‌ ‌3‌ ‌

I.‌ ‌Odd‌ ‌one‌ ‌out.‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌A.‌ ‌temple‌2.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌singer‌3.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌visited‌4.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌pepper‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Fill‌ ‌‌a,‌ ‌an,‌ ‌some,‌ ‌and‌ ‌any‌‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌blankets‌ ‌(4pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌an‌2.‌ ‌some‌3.‌ ‌some‌4.‌ ‌any‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌ ‌voice‌ ‌(2pts)‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌flowers‌ ‌are‌ ‌taken‌ ‌care‌ ‌of‌ ‌every‌ ‌day.‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌That‌ ‌bike‌ ‌was‌ ‌bought‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌

 ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson‌ ‌

 ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Introduce‌ ‌the‌ ‌new‌ ‌lesson.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌

and‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Check‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

Ex2.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌the‌ ‌crossword‌ ‌puzzle‌ ‌and‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌music‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌food‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌art‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌university‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌temple‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Pronunciation‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌pronounce‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌tʃ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌‌dʒ‌‌ ‌/‌ ‌;‌ ‌/‌ ‌o‌ ‌/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌o:‌ ‌/.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌

and‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌writes‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌A,B,C‌ ‌or‌ ‌D‌ ‌to‌ ‌show‌ ‌whose‌ ‌

underlined‌ ‌part‌ ‌is‌ ‌pronounced‌ ‌

differently.‌ ‌Listen,check‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌the‌ ‌

words.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌D.‌ ‌sure‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌cinema‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌compose‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌B.‌ ‌architect.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌C.‌ ‌question‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Grammar‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌structure:‌ ‌“How‌ ‌many,‌ ‌How‌ ‌much,some,‌ ‌a,an,‌ ‌any‌ ‌and‌ ‌passive‌ ‌

voice”.‌ ‌

Ex3:‌‌ ‌‌After‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌have‌ ‌done‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually,‌ ‌T‌ ‌quickly‌ ‌checks‌ ‌Ss’s‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌Complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌two‌ ‌

passages‌ ‌about‌ ‌camping.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌How‌ ‌much‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌How‌ ‌many‌ ‌ ‌

5.a‌ ‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌much‌ ‌ ‌

7.‌ ‌some‌ ‌ ‌

8‌ ‌many‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌the‌ ‌answer‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

-Asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex4.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌using‌ ‌the‌ ‌

suggested‌ ‌words‌ ‌or‌ ‌phrases.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I‌ ‌think‌ ‌classical‌ ‌music‌ ‌is‌ ‌as‌ ‌exciting‌ ‌as‌ ‌

country‌ ‌music.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌These‌ ‌clothes‌ ‌are‌ ‌not‌ ‌as‌ ‌expensive‌ ‌as‌ ‌I‌ ‌

thought.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌My‌ ‌taste‌ ‌in‌ ‌art‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌hers‌ ‌(‌ ‌her‌ ‌

taste)‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌The‌ ‌price‌ ‌of‌ ‌foods‌ ‌in‌ ‌HaNoi‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌the‌ ‌

same‌ ‌as‌ ‌it‌ ‌is‌ ‌in‌ ‌Hai‌ ‌Phong.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Life‌ ‌in‌ ‌Viet‌ ‌Nam‌ ‌is‌ ‌different‌ ‌from‌ ‌life‌ ‌

in‌ ‌England.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

5.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive‌.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌song‌ ‌Auld‌ ‌Lang‌ ‌Syne‌ ‌is‌ ‌sung‌ ‌on‌ ‌

some‌ ‌occasions.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Vietnam’s‌ ‌anthem‌ ‌Tien‌ ‌Quan‌ ‌Ca‌ ‌was‌ ‌

composed‌ ‌by‌ ‌Van‌ ‌Cao.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌is‌ ‌ferformed‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌pool.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌A‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌meat‌ ‌was‌ ‌bought‌ ‌(‌ ‌by‌ ‌his‌ ‌

mother‌ ‌)‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌rice‌ ‌noodles‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

best‌ ‌variety‌ ‌of‌ ‌rice.‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌practise‌ ‌at‌ ‌home:‌ ‌Everyday‌ ‌English.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Review‌ ‌unit‌ ‌4-6‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌2‌ ‌(Skills).‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌52:‌ ‌REVIEW‌ ‌2‌ ‌(SKILLS)‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌the‌ ‌reading,‌ ‌listening,‌ ‌

speaking‌ ‌and‌ ‌writing.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowlegdes:‌ ‌

a.‌ ‌Vocabulary:‌ ‌‌Review‌ ‌some‌ ‌words‌ ‌in‌ ‌unit‌ ‌5,6‌ ‌

b.‌ ‌Grammar:‌ ‌‌The‌ ‌form‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌present‌ ‌simple‌ ‌and‌ ‌past‌ ‌passive‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities:‌ ‌‌Ss‌ ‌will‌ ‌be‌ ‌more‌ ‌responsible‌ ‌for‌ ‌studying.‌ ‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌song‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌ ‌

Students’‌ ‌and‌ ‌teacher’s‌ ‌activities‌ ‌

Contents‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1.‌ ‌Warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌To‌ ‌warm‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌class‌ ‌

 ‌

Ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌sing‌ ‌a‌ ‌song‌ ‌in‌ ‌English‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌2.‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌reading‌ ‌skill.‌ ‌

Ex1:‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Guide‌ ‌the‌ ‌way‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌reading‌ ‌skill.‌ ‌

-For‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌1,‌ ‌ask‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

answers‌ ‌individually.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌the‌ ‌correct‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Read‌ ‌their‌ ‌descriptions‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌

boxes.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Gone‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌Wind:‌ ‌3,5‌ ‌

-‌ ‌A‌ ‌Space‌ ‌Odyssey:‌ ‌1,2,‌ ‌4‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3.‌ ‌Speaking‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌practice‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌skill:using‌ ‌Will‌ ‌or‌ ‌would‌ ‌like.‌ ‌

Ex‌ ‌2:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs,‌ ‌asking‌ ‌and‌ ‌

answering‌ ‌question‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌suggestions.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌may‌ ‌go‌ ‌around‌ ‌to‌ ‌help‌ ‌weaker‌ ‌Ss.‌ ‌

Ex3:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups‌ ‌taking‌ ‌turns‌ ‌to‌ ‌

talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌arrangements‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌trip.‌ ‌Then‌ ‌

asks‌ ‌each‌ ‌group‌ ‌to‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌St‌ ‌who‌ ‌

does‌ ‌the‌ ‌task‌ ‌best‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌in‌ ‌front‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌Asks‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌give‌ ‌comments.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Ask‌ ‌and‌ ‌answer‌ ‌questions‌ ‌about‌ ‌the‌ ‌

following‌ ‌ideas.‌ ‌You‌ ‌can‌ ‌use‌ ‌will‌ ‌,would‌ ‌

like.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Where‌ ‌and‌ ‌when‌ ‌you‌ ‌go‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Who‌ ‌you‌ ‌go‌ ‌with‌ ‌

-‌ ‌How‌ ‌you‌ ‌travel‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌you‌ ‌bring‌ ‌

-‌ ‌What‌ ‌you‌ ‌do‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Work‌ ‌in‌ ‌groups.‌ ‌Take‌ ‌turns‌ ‌talking‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌arrangements‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌trip.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌4.‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌

Goal:‌ ‌‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌practice‌ ‌listening‌ ‌skill‌ ‌

Ex4:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌which‌ ‌the‌ ‌

man‌ ‌uses‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌his‌ ‌meal‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌

restaurant.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌once‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

Ex5:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌menu.‌ ‌

T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌menu.‌ ‌

 ‌

4.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌man‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌his‌ ‌meal‌ ‌

in‌ ‌a‌ ‌restaurant‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌you‌ ‌

hear.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌great‌ ‌3.‌ ‌fresh‌ ‌4.‌ ‌delicious‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌sweet‌ ‌6.‌ ‌tasty‌ ‌8.‌ ‌Good‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

5.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌menu.‌ ‌

Menu‌ ‌

Appetizer‌ ‌

Salad‌ ‌

Main‌ ‌dish‌ ‌

Fish,‌ ‌vegetables‌ ‌

Dessert‌ ‌

An‌ ‌ice‌ ‌cream‌ ‌


 ‌

Drink‌ ‌

A‌ ‌cup‌ ‌of‌ ‌tea‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌5.‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌

Aim‌:‌ ‌Help‌ ‌students‌ ‌know‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌the‌ ‌instructions‌ ‌of‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌a‌ ‌mushroom‌ ‌

omelette.‌ ‌

Ex6:‌ ‌

T‌ ‌sets‌ ‌up‌ ‌the‌ ‌writing‌ ‌activity.‌ ‌ ‌

T‌ ‌reminds‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌that‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌and‌ ‌most‌ ‌

important‌ ‌thing‌ ‌is‌ ‌always‌ ‌to‌ ‌think‌ ‌about‌ ‌

what‌ ‌they‌ ‌are‌ ‌going‌ ‌to‌ ‌write.‌ ‌In‌ ‌this‌ ‌case,‌ ‌

Ss‌ ‌may‌ ‌use‌ ‌the‌ ‌sequence‌ ‌of‌ ‌activities‌ ‌(‌ ‌

first,‌ ‌then,‌ ‌next,‌ ‌after‌ ‌that,‌ ‌and‌ ‌finally)‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌pictures‌ ‌below.‌ ‌Write‌ ‌the‌ ‌

instructions‌ ‌of‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌cook‌ ‌a‌ ‌mushroom‌ ‌

omelette.‌ ‌

First,‌ ‌slice‌ ‌the‌ ‌mushrooms.‌ ‌

Then,‌ ‌beat‌ ‌the‌ ‌eggs‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌bowl‌ ‌

Next,‌ ‌add‌ ‌salt‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌egg‌ ‌mixture.‌ ‌

After‌ ‌that,‌ ‌pour‌ ‌the‌ ‌eggs‌ ‌into‌ ‌a‌ ‌frying‌ ‌pan.‌ ‌

Add‌ ‌the‌ ‌mushrooms‌ ‌and‌ ‌cook.‌ ‌

Finally,‌ ‌fold‌ ‌the‌ ‌omelette‌ ‌in‌ ‌half.‌ ‌

 ‌

*Homework‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Review‌ ‌unit‌ ‌1-6‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Do‌ ‌exercises‌ ‌in‌ ‌workbook.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌coming‌ ‌test.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌53:‌ ‌REVISION‌ ‌FOR‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌TERM‌ ‌TEST‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌language‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌

include:‌ ‌pronunciation,‌ ‌vocabulary‌ ‌and‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌1-6‌ ‌by‌ ‌

doing‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowledge:‌‌ ‌review‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌1‌ ‌to‌ ‌6‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities‌:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌the‌ ‌using‌ ‌of‌ ‌English.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan,‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1‌ ‌:Review‌ ‌pronunciation‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌tells‌ ‌the‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌the‌ ‌first‌ ‌tongue‌ ‌twister‌ ‌

for‌ ‌practising‌ ‌the‌ ‌sounds‌ ‌/‌ ‌ə/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/3:/,/‌ ‌

f/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/v/,‌ ‌/g/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/k/,/ʃ/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌ʒ/;‌ ‌/‌ ‌ɑ/‌ ‌

and‌ ‌/‌ ‌ɔ:/;‌ ‌/,/tʃ/‌ ‌and‌ ‌/‌ ‌dʒ/‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌plays‌ ‌the‌ ‌tape‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌has‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌practise‌ ‌individually,‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌and‌ ‌practice‌ ‌

individually‌ ‌and‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌

PRONUNCIATION‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Circle‌ ‌the‌ ‌word‌ ‌in‌ ‌which‌ ‌the‌ ‌

underlined‌ ‌sound‌ ‌is‌ ‌pronounced‌ ‌

differently.‌ ‌Listen,‌ ‌check‌ ‌and‌ ‌repeat‌ ‌

the‌ ‌words.‌ ‌

4.B‌ ‌5.C‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2‌ ‌:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌vocabularies‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌exercise‌ ‌

individually,‌ ‌and‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

with‌ ‌a‌ ‌partner.‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌the‌ ‌

board.‌ ‌

-Checks‌ ‌the‌ ‌answers‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌

class.‌ ‌

VOCABULARY‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Do‌ ‌the‌ ‌crossword‌ ‌puzzle‌ ‌and‌ ‌

complete‌ ‌teh‌ ‌sentences.‌ ‌

Key‌ ‌

5.university‌ ‌6.temple‌ ‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌3‌ ‌:‌ ‌Review‌ ‌grammar‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌write‌ ‌his/her‌ ‌answers‌ ‌on‌ ‌

the‌ ‌board.‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌checks‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌whole‌ ‌class.‌ ‌

GRAMMAR‌ ‌

5.Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌passive.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌song‌ ‌Auld‌ ‌Lang‌ ‌Syne‌ ‌is‌ ‌sung‌ ‌on‌ ‌

some‌ ‌occasions.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Vietnam’s‌ ‌anthem‌ ‌Tien‌ ‌Quan‌ ‌Ca‌ ‌was‌ ‌

composed‌ ‌by‌ ‌Van‌ ‌Cao.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Water‌ ‌puppetry‌ ‌is‌ ‌ferformed‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌pool.‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌A‌ ‌lot‌ ‌of‌ ‌meat‌ ‌was‌ ‌bought‌ ‌(‌ ‌by‌ ‌his‌ ‌

mother‌ ‌)‌ ‌yesterday.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌The‌ ‌rice‌ ‌noodles‌ ‌are‌ ‌made‌ ‌from‌ ‌the‌ ‌

best‌ ‌variety‌ ‌of‌ ‌rice.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌preparation‌ ‌

Date‌ ‌of‌ ‌teaching‌ ‌

Class‌ ‌

Absentees‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7A‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

7B‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

Period‌ ‌54:‌ ‌REVISION‌ ‌FOR‌ ‌THE‌ ‌FIRST‌ ‌TERM‌ ‌TEST‌ ‌

 ‌

I.‌ ‌Objectives:‌ ‌‌By‌ ‌the‌ ‌end‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌lesson,‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌can‌ ‌review‌ ‌the‌ ‌language‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌

include:‌ ‌reading,‌ ‌listenning,‌ ‌speaking‌ ‌and‌ ‌writing‌ ‌they‌ ‌have‌ ‌learnt‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌1-6‌ ‌by‌ ‌

doing‌ ‌exercises.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Knowledge:‌‌ ‌review‌ ‌from‌ ‌unit‌ ‌1‌ ‌to‌ ‌6‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Competences:‌ ‌‌Teamwork‌ ‌and‌ ‌independent‌ ‌working,‌ ‌pair‌ ‌work,‌ ‌linguistic‌ ‌

competence,‌ ‌cooperative‌ ‌learning‌ ‌and‌ ‌communicative‌ ‌competence‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Qualities‌:‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌love‌ ‌the‌ ‌using‌ ‌of‌ ‌English.‌ ‌

II.‌ ‌Teaching‌ ‌aids:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Materials:‌ ‌‌Text‌ ‌book,‌ ‌plan‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Equipment:‌‌ ‌computer‌ ‌accessed‌ ‌to‌ ‌the‌ ‌Internet,‌ ‌projector,‌ ‌loudspeaker‌ ‌

III.‌ ‌Procedure:‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌attendance.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Checkup‌ ‌the‌ ‌old‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌New‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌1‌ ‌:‌ ‌Reading‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌gives‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌a‌ ‌passage‌ ‌about‌ ‌Charlie‌ ‌

Chaplin.‌ ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers‌ ‌

-T‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌

READING‌ ‌

1.Read‌ ‌the‌ ‌passage‌ ‌and‌ ‌choose‌ ‌the‌ ‌

correct‌ ‌answer.‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌In‌ ‌1910‌ ‌he‌ ‌began‌ ‌to‌ ‌perform‌ ‌

pantomime‌ ‌in‌ ‌___________.‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌the‌ ‌US‌ ‌B.London‌ ‌C.Switzerland‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌When‌ ‌did‌ ‌he‌ ‌start‌ ‌appearing‌ ‌in‌ ‌films?‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌In‌ ‌1910‌ ‌B.In‌ ‌1914‌ ‌C.In‌ ‌1972‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌In‌ ‌about‌ ‌how‌ ‌many‌ ‌films‌ ‌did‌ ‌he‌ ‌play‌ ‌

the ‌Tramp‌?‌ ‌

A.‌ ‌Seventy‌ ‌B.‌ ‌Seventeen‌ ‌C.Twenty-five‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Charlie‌ ‌Chaplin‌ ‌is‌ ‌very‌ ‌famous‌ ‌for‌ ‌

____.‌ ‌

A.his‌ ‌stage‌ ‌performance‌ ‌

B.his‌ ‌background‌ ‌music‌ ‌

C.his‌ ‌character‌ ‌“the‌ ‌Tramp‌ ‌

5.Which‌ ‌of‌ ‌the‌ ‌following‌ ‌is‌ ‌NOT‌ ‌true?‌ ‌

A.Charlie‌ ‌Chaplin‌ ‌was‌ ‌an‌ ‌English‌ ‌artist.‌ ‌

B.He‌ ‌played‌ ‌classical‌ ‌music.‌ ‌

C.He‌ ‌received‌ ‌an‌ ‌award‌ ‌in‌ ‌1972.‌ ‌

*Key:‌‌ ‌1.A‌ ‌2.B‌ ‌3.A‌ ‌4.B‌ ‌5.C‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌2‌ ‌:‌ ‌Speaking‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

 ‌

SPEAKING‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌asks‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌works‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs‌ ‌to‌ ‌talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌

3‌ ‌topics‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌in‌ ‌pairs.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌calls‌ ‌some‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌share‌ ‌their‌ ‌ideas‌ ‌

about‌ ‌the‌ ‌topics.‌ ‌

-‌ ‌T‌ ‌give‌ ‌feedbacks‌ ‌and‌ ‌corrects‌ ‌if‌ ‌any‌ ‌

1.Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌three‌ ‌topics‌ ‌below.‌ ‌

1.Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌your‌ ‌favorite‌ ‌food‌ ‌or‌ ‌drink‌ ‌

and‌ ‌how‌ ‌to‌ ‌make‌ ‌it.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌your‌ ‌volunteer‌ ‌activities.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌Talk‌ ‌about‌ ‌something‌ ‌you‌ ‌can‌ ‌do‌ ‌to‌ ‌

improve‌ ‌your‌ ‌health.‌ ‌

Activity‌ ‌3‌ ‌:‌ ‌Listening‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

-Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌adjectives‌ ‌which‌ ‌

the‌ ‌man‌ ‌uses‌ ‌to‌ ‌describe‌ ‌his‌ ‌meal‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌

restaurant.‌ ‌Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌the‌ ‌recording‌ ‌once‌ ‌

for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌listen‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌their‌ ‌answers.‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-‌ ‌Have‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌look‌ ‌at‌ ‌the‌ ‌menu.‌ ‌Play‌ ‌the‌ ‌

recording‌ ‌again‌ ‌for‌ ‌Ss‌ ‌to‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

menu.‌ ‌

 ‌

LISTENING‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌to‌ ‌a‌ ‌man‌ ‌talking‌ ‌about‌ ‌his‌ ‌

meal‌ ‌in‌ ‌a‌ ‌restaurant‌ ‌and‌ ‌tick‌ ‌the‌ ‌

adjectives‌ ‌you‌ ‌hear.‌ ‌

KEY‌ ‌:‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌great‌ ‌3.‌ ‌fresh‌ ‌4.‌ ‌delicious‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌sweet‌ ‌6.‌ ‌tasty‌ ‌8.‌ ‌good‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Listen‌ ‌again‌ ‌and‌ ‌complete‌ ‌the‌ ‌

menu.‌ ‌

Menu‌ ‌

Appetizer‌ ‌

Salad‌ ‌

Main‌ ‌dish‌ ‌

Fish,‌ ‌vegetables‌ ‌

Dessert‌ ‌

An‌ ‌ice‌ ‌cream‌ ‌

Drink‌ ‌

A‌ ‌cup‌ ‌of‌ ‌tea‌ ‌

 ‌

Activity‌ ‌4‌ ‌:‌ ‌Writing‌ ‌ ‌

Teacher’s‌ ‌and‌ ‌Ss’activities‌ ‌

Content‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

 ‌

-Ss‌ ‌do‌ ‌this‌ ‌task‌ ‌individually‌ ‌

WRITING‌ ‌

1.Reorder‌ ‌the‌ ‌words‌ ‌or‌ ‌phrases‌ ‌given‌ ‌

to‌ ‌make‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌I/‌ ‌a‌ ‌/‌ ‌toothache/‌ ‌have.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌like/‌ ‌to/‌ ‌I’d/‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌sun/‌ ‌and/‌ ‌books/‌ ‌

read/‌ ‌sit.‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌bananas/‌ ‌How‌ ‌many/‌ ‌do/‌ ‌need/‌ ‌you?‌ ‌

4.‌ ‌This‌ ‌school/‌ ‌last‌ ‌year/‌ ‌built/was.‌ ‌

5.‌ ‌Dong‌ ‌Ho‌ ‌paintings/Bac‌ ‌Ninh/‌ ‌in/‌ ‌

made/‌ ‌Province/‌ ‌are.‌ ‌

6.‌ ‌Eat/‌ ‌less/‌ ‌junk‌ ‌food.‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌Rewrite‌ ‌the‌ ‌sentences‌ ‌with‌ ‌the‌ ‌given‌ ‌

words‌ ‌without‌ ‌changing‌ ‌the‌ ‌meaning‌ ‌

1.‌ ‌The‌ ‌price‌ ‌of‌ ‌food‌ ‌is‌ ‌the‌ ‌same‌ ‌as‌ ‌it‌ ‌was‌ ‌

last‌ ‌year.‌ ‌‌(not‌ ‌different‌ ‌from)‌ ‌

🡪‌ ‌The‌ ‌price‌ ‌of‌ ‌food…………………‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌This‌ ‌dress‌ ‌is‌ ‌not‌ ‌more‌ ‌expensive‌ ‌than‌ ‌

I‌ ‌thought‌ ‌at‌ ‌first.‌ ‌‌(as…..as)‌ ‌

🡪‌ ‌This‌ ‌dress‌ ‌………………………..‌ ‌

3.‌ ‌They‌ ‌grow‌ ‌rice‌ ‌in‌ ‌the‌ ‌tropical‌ ‌

countries.‌ ‌‌(passive‌ ‌voice)‌ ‌


🡪‌ ‌Rice………………………………‌ ‌

2.‌ ‌They‌ ‌built‌ ‌my‌ ‌school‌ ‌10‌ ‌years‌ ‌ago.‌ ‌

(passive‌ ‌voice)‌ ‌

🡪‌ ‌My‌ ‌school‌ ‌………………………..‌ ‌

 ‌

*‌ ‌Homework‌ ‌ ‌

-‌ ‌Prepare‌ ‌for‌ ‌the‌ ‌next‌ ‌lesson:‌ ‌The‌ ‌first‌ ‌term‌ ‌examination‌ ‌

 ‌



Ngoài Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 7 Theo Công Văn 5512 Học Kì 1 Rất Hay thì các tài liệu học tập trong chương trình 7 sẽ được cập nhật liên tục và nhanh nhất có thể sau khi kỳ thi diễn ra trên Danh mục Tài Liệu Học Tập nhằm giúp các bạn đọc thuận tiện trong việc nghiên cứu tài liệu. Quý thày cô và các bạn đọc có thể chia sẻ thêm những tài liệu học tập hữu ích đến địa chỉ email của chúng tôi, nhằm xây dựng nên kho đề thi phong phú, đa dạng cho các em học sinh tham khảo và rèn luyện.

Xem thêm

Giáo Án Vật Lí 7 HK1 Phát Triển Năng Lực Theo 5 Bước Hoạt Động
Đề Thi Ngữ Văn 7 Giữa Học Kì 2 Chân Trời Sáng Tạo Năm 2022-2023
Sách Bài Tập Tiếng Anh Lớp 7 Cả Năm Sách Thí Điểm Có Đáp Án
25 Đề Ôn Thi Ngữ Văn 7 Giữa Học Kì 2 Năm 2022-2023 Có Đáp Án
Đề Cương Ôn Tập Vật Lý Lớp 7 HK2 – Tài Liệu Vật Lý Lớp 7
50 Đề Rèn Luyện Kỹ Năng Đọc Hiểu Ngữ Văn 7 Có Đáp Án
Bài Tập Thực Hành Chuyên Sâu Tiếng Anh 7 Unit 1: My Hobbies Có Lời Giải